Simocode Manual

System Manual Version 10/2004
Totally
I n t e gr a t e d
Automation
sirius
MOTOR MANAGEMENT
SIMOCODE pro
Important Notes,
Table of Contents
System Description 1
Short Instructions for Con- 2
figuring a Reversing Starter
SIMOCODE pro
Motor Protection 3
Motor Control 4
Monitoring Functions 5
System Manual
Outputs 6
Inputs 7
Standard Function Blocks 8
Logic Modules 9
Communication 10
Mounting, Wiring and Inter- 11
faces
Commissioning and Servicing 12

Tables A
Data Formats and Data B
Records
Dimension Drawings C
Order Number: 3UF7970-0AA00-0 Technical Data D
Edition 10/2004
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety as well as to avoid
property damage. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring to property damage only have no safety alert symbol.
Danger
indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Warning
indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Caution
used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate injury.
Caution
used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in property damage.
Notice
used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided, may result in
an undesirable result or state.
When several danger levels apply, the notices of the highest level (lower number) are always displayed. If a
notice refers to personal damages with the safety alert symbol, then another notice may be added warning of
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this documentation. Only qualified
personnel should be allowed to install and work on the equipment. Qualified persons are defined as persons who
are authorized to commission, to earth, and to tag circuits, equipment and systems in accordance with
established safety practices and standards.
Intended Use
Please note the following:
Warning
This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or
technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers
approved or recommended by Siemens.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up and installed
correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.
Trademarks
All designations marked with ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Other designations in this
documentation might be trademarks which, if used by third parties for their purposes, might infringe upon the
rights of the proprietors.
Copyright Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved Disclaimer of Liability

Reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and
express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. full agreement. However, the data in the manual are reviewed regularly, and any
necessary corrections will be included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for
improvement are welcomed.
Siemens AG
Automation and Drives Group Siemens AG 2004
P.O. Box 4848, D-90327 Nuremberg (Germany) Technical data subject to change
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft A5E00248055-02

Table of Contents
Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1-2

1.2 Simplify configuration with SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1-4
1.3 Application example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1-6
1.4 Checklist for selecting the device series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1-8
1.5 Function overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1-10
1.5.1 Protecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1-10
1.5.2 Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1-10
1.5.3 Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1-13
1.5.4 Standard function modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1-13
1.5.5 Operating, service and diagnostic data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1-14
1.5.6 Additional signal processing with freely programmable logic modules .. . 1-15
1.6 Overview of system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1-16
1.7 Description of the system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1-19
1.7.1 Basic units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1-19
1.7.2 Operator panel (OP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1-20
1.7.3 Current measurement modules (IM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1-21
1.7.4 Current/voltage measurement modules (UM)
for the SIMOCODE pro V device series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1-22
1.7.5 Expansion modules for the SIMOCODE pro V device series . . . . . . .. . 1-23
1.7.6 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1-25
1.7.7 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1-26
1.8 Structural configuration of SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1-27
1.8.1 Function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1-27
2 Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Introduction and target of the example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.2 Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control station . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3 Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.4 Extending the reversing starter with a control station via PROFIBUS DP . . 2-10
3 Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

3.2 Overload protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3 Asymmetry monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.4 Blocking protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.5 Temperature monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
4 Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Control stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.2 Modes of operation and mode selectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 i
Table of Contents
4.1.3 Enables and enabled control command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 4-8

4.1.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 4-9
4.2 Control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 4-10
4.2.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 4-10
4.2.2 General settings and definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 4-13
4.2.3 Overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 4-16
4.2.4 Direct starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 4-17
4.2.5 Reversing starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 4-19
4.2.6 Circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 4-22
4.2.7 Star-delta starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 4-25
4.2.8 Star-delta starters with reversal of the direction of rotation . . . . . . . .. . 4-28
4.2.9 Dahlander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 4-32
4.2.10 Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 4-35
4.2.11 Pole-changing switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 4-38
4.2.12 Pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation . . . . . .. . 4-41
4.2.13 Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 4-44
4.2.14 Slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 4-46
4.2.15 Soft starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 4-51
4.2.16 Soft reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 4-53
4.3 Active control stations, contactor & lamp controls and status signal
of the control functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56
5 Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Earth-fault monitoring via current/voltage measurement module . . .. .. . 5-2

5.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-2
5.1.2 Internal earth fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-2
5.2 Current limit monitoring . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-3
5.2.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-3
5.2.2 I> (upper limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-5
5.2.3 I< (lower limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-6
5.3 Operation monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-7
5.3.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-7
5.3.2 Operating hours monitoring . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-8
5.3.3 Stop time monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-8
5.3.4 Monitoring the number of starts . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-9
6 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 6-2

6.2 Basic unit (BU) . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 6-4
6.3 Operator panel (OP) . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 6-6
6.4 Digital modules (DM) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 6-8
6.5 Cyclic signaling . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 6-10
6.6 Acyclic signaling . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 6-12
7 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 7-2

7.2 Basic unit (BU) . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 7-4
7.3 Digital modules (DM) . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 7-6
7.4 Cyclic controlling. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 7-8
SIMOCODE pro
ii GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Table of Contents
7.5 Acyclic controlling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
8 Standard Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 8-2

8.2 Test/reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 8-3
8.3 Test position feedback (TPF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 8-7
8.4 External fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 8-9
8.5 Operational protection OFF (OPO) . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 8-11
8.5.1 Response for slider control function . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 8-11
8.5.2 Response to other control functions . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 8-12
8.6 Power failure monitoring (UVO . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 8-13
8.7 Emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 8-15
8.8 Watchdog (bus monitoring, PLC/DCS monitoring) . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 8-16
8.9 Timestamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 8-18
8.9.1 Time stamping in the fault memory . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 8-18
9 Logic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 9-2

9.2 Truth table for 3I/1O . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 9-3
9.5 Counters . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 9-8
9.6 Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 9-10
9.7 Signal conditioner . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 9-13
9.8 Non-volatile elements . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 9-16
9.9 Flashing . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 9-19
9.10 Flickering . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 9-20
9.11 Limit monitor . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 9-21
10 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . 10-2

10.1.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . 10-2
10.2 Transmitting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . 10-4
10.3 Configuring SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . 10-6
10.3.1 Configuring with a GSD file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . 10-6
10.3.2 Configuring with the SIMOCODE ES software. . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . 10-8
10.3.3 Configuring with SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . 10-8
10.4 Telegram description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . 10-9
10.5 Process image (cyclic data) and data records (acyclic data) . .. . . .. .. . 10-10
10.6 Diagnostics with STEP 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . 10-11
10.6.1 Reading out the diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . 10-11
10.6.2 Configuring the slave diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . 10-12
10.6.3 Station status 1 to 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . 10-13
10.6.4 Master PROFIBUS address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . 10-15
10.6.5 Manufacturer's identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . 10-15
10.6.6 Identification-related diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . 10-16
10.6.7 Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . 10-17
10.6.8 Channel-related diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . 10-18
10.6.9 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . 10-19
10.6.10Data records - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . 10-20
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 iii
Table of Contents
11 Mounting, Wiring and Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.1 General information about mounting and wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 11-2

11.2 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 11-3
11.2.1 Mounting the basic units and expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 11-3
11.2.2 Mounting the current measurement modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 11-4
11.2.3 Mounting the operator panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 11-5
11.3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 11-6
11.3.1 Detachable terminals for basic units and expansion modules . . . . . . .. . 11-6
11.3.2 Current measurement with current measurement modules . . . . . . . .. . 11-9
11.4 System interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 11-10
11.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 11-10
11.4.2 Basic units, expansion modules and current measurement modules . .. . 11-12
11.4.3 Operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 11-14
11.4.4 PROFIBUS DP on a 9-pole SUB-D socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 11-16
11.5 Installation guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 11-17
12 Commissioning and Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1 General information about commissioning and servicing. .. .. . . .. .. . 12-2

12.2 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . 12-3
12.2.1 Sequence of steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . 12-3
12.2.2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . 12-4
12.2.3 Diagnostics via LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . 12-5
12.3 Servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . 12-6
12.3.1 Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . 12-6
12.3.2 Saving the parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . 12-7
12.3.3 Replace SIMOCODE pro components . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . 12-9
12.3.4 Configuring the basic factory default setting . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . 12-10
A Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1 Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and

status signals/messages for the control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.2 Abbreviations and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.3 Socket assignment table - digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A.4 Socket assignment table - analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
A.5 Detailled signals of the slave diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
B Data Formats and Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B.1 Handling data records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-2

B.1.1 Writing/reading data records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-2
B.1.2 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-3
B.1.3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-3
B.2 Data record 67 - process image of the outputs . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-4
B.3 Data record 69 - process image of the inputs. . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-5
B.4 Data record 92 - device diagnostics . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-6
B.5 Data record 94 - measured values . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-14
B.6 Data record 95 - Service/statistics data . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-15
B.7 Data record 130 - base device parameter 1 . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-16
B.8 Data record 131 - base device parameter 2 (plug) . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-22
SIMOCODE pro
iv GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Table of Contents
B.9 Data record DS132 - extended device parameter 1 . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-26

B.10 Data record 133 - extended device parameter 2 (plug) . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-34
B.11 Data record 139 - labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-37
B.12 Data record 160 - communication parameters . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-38
B.13 Data record 165 - comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-38
B.14 Data record 202 - Acyclic controlling . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-39
B.15 Data record 203 - Acyclic signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-40
B.16 Data record 224 - password protection . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-41
C Dimension Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
C.1 3UF70 basic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . C-2

C.1.1 SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7 000 basic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . C-2
C.1.2 SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7 010 basic unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . C-2
C.2 3UF710 current measurement module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . C-3
C.2.1 Current measurement module (push-through converter)
3UF7 100, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7 101, 2.4 A up to 25 A. . . . .. .. .. .. .. . C-3
3UF7 102, 10 A to 100 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . C-4
3UF7 103, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . C-5
C.2.4 Current measurement module (rail connection)
3UF7 103, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . C-6
3UF7 104, 63 A to 630 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . C-7
C.3 3UF7 200 operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . C-8
C.4 3UF7 3 digital module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . C-9
C.5 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . C-10
C.5.1 Door adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . C-10
D Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D.1 Common technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2

D.2 Basic units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
D.3 Current measurement modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
D.4 Expansion modules (digital modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
D.5 Operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
D.6 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders
for short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . D-8
Index
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 v
Table of Contents
SIMOCODE pro
vi GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Important Notes
Purpose of the manual

The SIMOCODE pro system manual describes in detail the motor manage-
ment system and its functions. It contains information about configuring,
commissioning, service and maintenance. The user is introduced to the
system quickly and practically using a typical reversing-motor application as
an example.
This manual contains information specific to service and maintenance per-
sonnel in addition to assistance in fault detecting and elimination when a
fault occurs.
The manual contains circuit diagrams, dimension drawings, and technical
data about the system components to help with the configuration.
Required basic knowledge

A basic knowledge in the areas of low-voltage controls and distribution, digi-
tal circuit engineering and automisation technology is required in order to be
able to understand this manual.
Topics
The manual consists of chapters that can be consulted and the following
table contains a list of the relevant topics. The topics with a gray background
represent the contents of the “SIMOCODE ES” parameterization and ser-
vice software.
Topic Target group

System Description Configurators, planers
Short Instructions for Configuring a Rever- Configurators, technicians and commissio-
sing Starter ners
Motor Protection Configurators, commissioners
Motor Control Configurators
Monitoring Functions Configurators, commissioners, service
personnel
Inputs Configurators
Outputs Configurators
Standard Function Blocks Configurators
Logic Modules Configurators
Communication Configurators, PLC programmers
Mounting, Wiring and Interfaces Technicians, electricians, maintenance and
service personnel
Commissioning and Servicing Commissioners, electricians, maintenance
and service personnel
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 vii
Scope of application
This manual is applicable for the components included in the
SIMOCODE pro system. It contains a description of the components that
are applicable at the time of printing the document. We reserve the right to
include information about new components or new versions of components
in an additional document.
Further documentation
• Please read the operating manuals of the corresponding components.
• The DP-Master manual is also required in addition to this system manual.
Definitions
• If “SIMOCODE pro” is referred to, then both the “SIMOCODE pro C” and
the “SIMOCODE pro V” series are meant.
Tables for the response of SIMOCODE pro

Using SIMOCODE, specific responses (deactivated, signal, warn, switch off)
can be parameterized for various functions (e.g. overload). They are also dis-
played in the following table:
• “X” = applicable
• “-” = not applicable
• “d” = default
Response Function 1 Function 2 Function 3

Switch off - X (d) X
Warn X (d) X -
Signal X X -
Not active X X X (d)
Delay 25 s - -
Short description of the response

• Deactivated: The corresponding function is switched off, no signals are gene-
rated.
• Signal: Only a device-internal signal is generated, which can be further pro-
cessed in any way.
• Warn: A warning signal, which is available as a diagnostic for PROFIBUS DP, is
generated in addition to the device-internal signal.
• Switch off: The contactor controls QE* are switched off. An error message is
generated which is available as a diagnostic for PROFIBUS DP. The error mes-
sage and the device-internal signal remain on until the corresponding time
has elapsed or the cause of the error has been eliminated and acknowledged.
A delay time can also be specified for specific responses.
SIMOCODE pro
viii GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Correction sheet
A correction sheet is included at the end of this manual. Please use it to fill
in suggestions for improvements, additions and corrections and send it back
to us. This helps us to improve the next edition.
Exclusion of liability
The products described here were developed to carry out protection tasks
as part of a complete plant or machine. In general, a complete safety
system consists of sensors, evaluation units, signaling devices and methods
for safe switching off. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure the
safe functioning of the complete plant or machine.
Siemens AG, its subsiduries and associated companies (hereon referred to
as "Siemens") is not in the position to guarantee every characteristic of a
complete plant or machine that is not designed by Siemens.
Siemens also denies all responsibility for any recommendations that are
given or implied in the following description. No new guarantee, warranty or
liability above those standard to Siemens can be derived from the following
description.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 ix
SIMOCODE
x GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description 1
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find an introduction and general information about
the SIMOCODE pro system including e.g.
• characteristics of both the SIMOCODE pro C and the
SIMOCODE pro V device series
• simplifications of circuits with SIMOCODE pro
• a function overview
• an overview of the system components.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• planners and configurators
• people who are now using SIMOCODE DP and in the future want to use
SIMOCODE pro as a replacement or as an additional system
• optional for commissioners, maintenance and service personnel as additional
information about SIMOCODE pro
• system integrators/process technology.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• basic knowledge about load feeders
• basic knowledge about motor protection
• basic knowledge of control engineering
• basic knowledge of industrial bus technology.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 1-1
System Description
1.1 Introduction
Description
SIMOCODE pro (SIRIUS Motor Management and Control Devices) is a
system of motor management and control devices with a PROFIBUS DP
interface. SIMOCODE pro is the further development of the SIMOCODE DP
system.
SIMOCODE pro is a flexible, modular motor management system which

combines all functions necessary for a motor feeder. Only the switching and
protection mechanisms of the main circuit (contactors, circuit breakers,
fuses) are additionally needed. The system protects and monitors the motor
feeder independently of the automation system.
SIMOCODE pro makes the motor feeder controllable in an easy way and
also automatically implements all the necessary interlockings. It provides a
lot of operating, service and diagnostic data making the functionality of the
motor feeder more transparent. It integrates the motor feeder completely
into a main automation system via PROFIBUS DP.
Device series
SIMOCODE pro can be subdivided into two device series with different
functions:
• SIMOCODE pro C - the compact system for direct and reversing starters
and
• SIMOCODE pro V - the variable system which also offers many other additio-
nal functions in addition to the SIMOCODE pro C functions
Additional control programs are integrated in SIMOCODE pro V for star-delta
starters, Dahlanders, pole-changing switches, soft starters - each also in combi-
nation with reversal of the direction of rotation, as well as valves and sliders.
SIMOCODE pro V is also especially versatile. Its functionality can be extended if
required, e.g.
– the number of binary inputs and outputs can be increased in stages and are
adjustable, new types can be added
– a current/voltage measurement module can be used for additional voltage
measuring and for monitoring power-related measured values (power mana-
gement)
– a temperature module enables the evaluation of several analog temperature
sensors
– another earth-fault detection system can be integrated together with a sum-
mation current transformer
– an analog module extends the system by an additional analog input and out-
put, for example, for fill-level or flow-rate monitoring
SIMOCODE pro C is upwards-compatible to SIMOCODE pro V. This means
that you can use both ranges simultaneously in your plant.
SIMOCODE pro
1-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
Independent operation
SIMOCODE pro C and pro V protect and control the motor feeder indepen-
dently of the automation system. Thus, if the automation system (PLC) fails
or if communication is disrupted, the motor feeder can still be operated.
SIMOCODE pro can be used without being connected to PROFIBUS DP.
This can, for example, be connected later.
Typical configuration
The following schematic shows a typical configuration of SIMOCODE pro C
and SIMOCODE pro V:
SIMOCODE pro C
Basic unit (BU1)
Current measurement
module (IM)
Operator panel (OP)
UF-01129
Maximum configuration
SIMOCODE pro V Basic unit (BU2)
Digital module (DM)

Current measurement Analog module (AM)
module (IM)
Operator panel (OP)

UF-01130
Additional optional expansions are possible
Figure 1-1: Typical configurations of SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 1-3
System Description
1.2 Simplify configuration with SIMOCODE pro

Conventional configuration without SIMOCODE pro
Individual components are used for all the control, monitoring and signal
pre-processing. The following components must be used and the following
wiring must be carried out:
• inserting and wiring up the overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices,
current transformers, analog/digital converters
• wiring up the control circuit
• connecting the control devices for start/stop
• bringing the contactor into locking mode via auxiliary switches
• wiring up the interlocks
The following figure shows the conventional configuration of a direct starter:
3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230V 1L1

L1 -F4
L2
L3
N Automation level / I/O module
PE
-Q1
Feedback Control commands
-F2-
Thermistor
1 3 5
-Q1 open
Overload
Man. / aut.
Current
ON / OFF
Q1
OFF
ON
-F3
2 4 6 -X1
1 3 5 -K11
- K1
2 4 6 Manual Automatic
-X2
1 3 5
- F2 Local stop
S1 PLC
2 4 6
Start/stop
Local start
2 -K12
4...20 mA S2 -K1
PE UVW
-K11 -K12
M ϑ 1 -K1 -K1 -F2 -F3 -Q1 D
3~ -X3 -F3 2
A
1 N
-K1 Thermistor Switchgear
evaluation
1N
Figure 1-2: Conventional configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter)
SIMOCODE pro
1-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
Configuration with SIMOCODE pro

Only SIMOCODE pro is used for complete control, monitoring and signal
pre-processing.
This offers the following advantages:
• additional overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices, current transfor-
mers, analog/digital converters are not necessary
• wiring up the control circuit (interlocking) is simplified
• the start and stop switches are wired directly to the inputs of the basic unit
• the contactor coil is activated via the output of the basic unit. The auxiliary
contact for locking is no longer necessary
The following figure shows the configuration with SIMOCODE pro:
3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230V

L1 PROFIBUS DP
L2
L3 L+
N
PE
L1/L+
1 3 5
Q1 F11 Control station -
local control [LC]
2 4 6 S0 S1
Current measurment A1 A2 IN1 IN2 24 V

module (IM) Basic unit (BU)
T1 T2 OUT 1 1
K1
1 3 5
- K1 N/L–
2 4 6
PE U V W
T1
M Thermistor
ϑ
3~ T2
Figure 1-3: Configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter) with SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 1-5
System Description
1.3 Application example

Description
The fill level is monitored in a liquid container. A pump keeps the liquid level
(reference value) almost constant by pumping more liquid into the container.
The fill level (actual value) is measured by the fill-level indicator and output-
ted as an analog signal. If the fill level sinks below a certain level, the pump
is switched on by SIMOCODE. Liquid is pumped in until the reference value
is again reached. Then the pump is switched off.
Controlling the pump

The pump can be controlled as follows:
• locally: control station - local control [LC] for manual switching on and off (by
visual inspection)
• in the switchgear cabinet door: control station operator panel [OP] for swit-
ching on and off manually
• in the automation level: control station PLC/DCS [DP] for remote-controlled
switching on and off (automatic operation)
• via SIMOCODE, by means of internal logic modules
Schematic
PLC/DCS Control station

3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230V PLC/DCS [DP]
L1 PROFIBUS DP
L2
L3 L+
N Fill-level indicator
PE
L1/L+
1 3 5
Q1 F11 Control station -
local control [LC]
2 4 6 S0 S1 Liquid container
Current measurement A1 A2 IN1 IN2 24 V In+ In– Control station -

module (IM) Analog module (AM) Operator panel
Basic unit (BU 2)
System Connecting cable
interface
T1 T2 OUT 1 1 Out+ Out–
Display
1 3 5 K1
- K1 N/L– Motor current
2 4 6
Pump
PE Optional:
U V W
Laptop with
T1
M Thermistor SIMOCODE ES
ϑ
3~ T2
Figure 1-4: Schematic of a typical application example
SIMOCODE pro
1-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
Record, display and evaluate the measured values

The following measured values are required for monitoring the process:
• pump motor current, which is measured by the current measurement module
• analog value of the fill-level indicator, which is measured by the analog
module
The measured values are evaluated directly by SIMOCODE pro or transfer-
red via PROFIBUS DP to the PLC/DCS and are evaluated there.
Optionally, e.g. a laptop can be connected to the operator panel with the
SIMOCODE ES software in order to evaluate further process data locally.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 1-7
System Description
1.4 Checklist for selecting the device series

The following checklist should help you decide on the best device series for
your requirements:
SIMOCODE pro
Requirement pro C pro V

(BU1) (BU2)
Standard motor feeders (4 inputs, 3 outputs)

with control functions for direct starters, ✓ ✓ 1)
reversing starters, intelligent overload relays
Monitoring of blocking, asymmetry, phase
failure ✓ ✓ 1)
Current measurement, current limit monito-

ring, overload protection ✓ ✓ 1)
Earth-fault monitoring via current measure-

ment module (internal) ✓ ✓ 1)
Thermistor motor protection with PTC (binary)

✓ ✓
Motor feeder with control function:

star-delta starters, Dahlanders, pole-changing — ✓ 1)
switches, soft starters – each also possible in
combination with reversal of the direction of
rotation –, valves, sliders
Measuring, processing and outputting analog
values e.g. flow rate, fill level, etc. — ✓ 2)
Current measurement and voltage measure-

ment — ✓ 3)
Voltage monitoring for undervoltage

— ✓ 3)
Power management, implementing power

considerations (power, power factor), power — ✓ 3)
monitoring
More than 4 digital inputs required
(maximum 12) — ✓ 2)
Table 1-1: Checklist for selecting the device series
1) via current measurement module

2) with expansion modules
3) via current/voltage measurement modules
SIMOCODE pro
1-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
Requirement pro C pro V

(BU1) (BU2)
More than 3 relay outputs required

(maximum 7) — ✓ 2)
Earth-fault monitoring with a summation cur-

rent transformer — ✓ 2)
Binary inputs for 110 ... 240 V AC/DC

(max. 8) — ✓ 2)
Bistable relay outputs (max. 4)

— ✓ 2)
Analog temperature monitoring with PTC,

NTC, PT100, PT1000 and KTY sensor types — ✓ 2)
Table 1-1: Checklist for selecting the device series (cont.)
1) via current measurement module

2) with expansion modules
3) via current/voltage measurement modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 1-9
System Description
1.5 Function overview

1.5.1 Protecting
For a more detailed description, please see chapter 3 “Motor Protection”
Electronic overload protection

The basic unit has several protection mechanisms for current-dependent
motor protection:
• overload protection
• phase asymmetry
• phase failure
Blocking protection
Please see chapter 3 "Motor Protection"
Thermistor motor protection

The basic units (BU1 and BU2) also make it possible to connect thermistor
sensors (binary PTC) for monitoring the motor temperature.
1.5.2 Monitoring
Earth-fault monitoring
The basic units have
• Internal earth-fault monitoring:
For motors with a 3-cable connection, the basic unit evaluates a possible
fault current/earth-fault current from the total current. Internal earth-fault
monitoring is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks
which are either grounded directly or grounded with a low impedance.
The internal earth-fault monitoring can be activated through parameterization.
It covers 2 operating cases:
– normal operating case up to 2 x Ie. The effective operating current must
be smaller than twice the set current Ie. Fault currents > 30% of the set
current Ie will be detected.
– start-up or overload operation from 2 x Ie. The effective operating cur-
rent is larger than twice the set current Ie. Fault currents > 15% of the
effective motor current will be detected.
Note
If you use the internal earth-fault detection for star-delta circuits, this can
lead to false trippings. For delta operation, the summation current is non-
zero due to harmonics.
SIMOCODE pro
1-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
• External earth-fault monitoring with SIMOCODE pro V:

the earth-fault module (EM) is needed to connect an external summation cur-
rent transformer (e.g 3UL22). Rated fault currents of 0.3 A / 0.5 A / 1 A are
evaluated by the 3UL22 summation current transformer.
A warning is triggered if the earth-fault limit is exceeded. You can set additio-
nal trippings through parameterization.
If the rated fault currents are exceeded,
SIMOCODE pro reacts either
• by turning off the contactor controls QE* or
• with a warning
depending on which configuration you set.
Current limit monitoring

The current limit monitoring function is used for process monitoring. Impen-
ding irregularities in the system can be detected in good time: Exceeding a
current limit which is still below the overload limit can e.g. indicate a dirty fil-
ter on a pump or a motor mounting which is running more and more sluggis-
hly. Falling below a current limit can be the first hint that a drive motor belt is
worn-out.
Voltage monitoring
SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of voltage monitoring. A three-phase
current network or a one-phase network can be monitored for undervoltage,
direction of rotation (for three-phase current) or availability.
Temperature monitoring
The temperature module from SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of imple-
menting an analog temperature monitoring of up to 3 sensor measuring cir-
cuits.
Monitoring active power

SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of monitoring the active power,
where not only the current, but also the power factor (cos phi) is taken into
account.
Monitoring the power factor (cos phi)

• For monitoring the operating status of the motor
• For detecting no-load operation for motors with low power (load rejection)
Monitoring analog signals

SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of reading, processing and monitoring
analog signals. The analog values can be transmitted to the automation
system or processed/evaluated in SIMOCODE. Any analog signal can be
outputted via the analog output.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 1-11
System Description
Monitoring operating hours, stop time and number of start-ups

SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and the stop times of a
motor in order to avoid plant down times due to failed motors because they
were either running too long (wear out) or they were stopped too long a
period of time.
For example, if an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal can be issued
which can indicate that maintenance on the relevant motor is necessary or
even that the motor should be replaced. After replacing the motor, the ope-
rating hours and stop times can be reset. In order to avoid excessive ther-
mal strain on a motor and its premature aging, the number of motor start-
ups in a selected time frame can be limited. The limited number of possible
starts can be indicated by pre-warnings.
All signals can be processed internally (limits) and/or registered by the

bus.
Control functions
Depending on the device series, the following parameterizable control
functions are available:
SIMOCODE
Control function pro C pro V

(BU1) (BU2)
Overload relays ✓ ✓ 1)
Direct starters ✓ ✓ 1)
Reversing starters ✓ ✓ 1)
Circuit breakers ✓ ✓ 1)
Star-delta starters, — ✓
can be combined with reversal of the direction
of rotation
Dahlander, — ✓
of rotation
Pole-changing switches, — ✓
of rotation
Valves — ✓
Sliders — ✓
Soft starters, — ✓
of rotation
1) Due to of additional requirements (e.g. power measurement), it may be necessary to
select the BU2 device version.
Table 1-2: Control functions
All the necessary protection functions and interlocks are already available
and can be flexibly adapted and extended.
SIMOCODE pro
1-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
1.5.3 Communication
PROFIBUS DP
SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB-D socket or
terminal connection on the basic units).
SIMOCODE pro supports, for example, the following services:
SIMOCODE
Service pro C pro V

(BU1) (BU2)
Baud rates up to 12 MBit/s ✓ ✓

Automatic baud rate recognition ✓ ✓
Cyclic services (DPV0) and acyclic ser- ✓ ✓
vices (DPV1)
Warnings according to DPV1 ✓ ✓
Time synchronization via PROFIBUS DP — ✓
Table 1-3: PROFIBUS DP services
1.5.4 Standard function modules
Standard function modules are predefined functions which can simply be

activated, e.g. time-staggered restart of the drives after a power failure.
SIMOCODE pro has the following standard function modules:
SIMOCODE
Standard function modules pro C pro V

(BU1) (BU2)
Number Number
Test 2 2
Reset 3 3
Test position feedback (TPF) 1 1
External fault 4 6
Operational protection off (OPO) — 1
Power failure monitoring (UVO) — 1
Emergency start 1 1
Watchdog (monitoring PLC/DCS) 1 1
Timestamping — 1
Table 1-4: Standard function modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 1-13
System Description
1.5.5 Operating, service and diagnostic data
SIMOCODE pro supplies a lot of operating, service and diagnostic data:
Operating data
• motor switching state
• all phase currents
• all phase voltages
• phase asymmetry
• phase cycle
• motor power/cos phi
• time to trip
• motor temperature
• remaining cooling down time
• etc.
Service data
Among other things, SIMOCODE pro yields the following information for
maintaining relevant data:
• motor operating hours
• motor stop times
• number of motor starts
• number of overload trippings
• internal comments saved in the device
• reason for switching off
• signals
• warnings
• faults
• etc.
Diagnostic data
• numerous detailed early warning signals and fault signals
• device-internal error protocolling with timestamp
• etc.
SIMOCODE pro
1-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
1.5.6 Additional signal processing with freely programmable logic modules
If you need any other additional functions for your application, you can use
the logic modules which can be programmed freely. These can be used, for
example, to implement logical functions, time relay functions and counter
functions.
Depending on the device series, the system offers several logic modules
which can be parameterized freely:
SIMOCODE
Logic module pro C pro V

(BU1) (BU2)
Number Number
Truth tables 3 inputs/ 1 output 3 6
Truth tables 2 inputs/ 1 output — 2
Truth tables 5 inputs/ 2 outputs — 1
Timers 2 4
Counters 2 4
Signal conditioners 2 4
Non-volatile elements 2 4
Flashing 3 3
Flickering 3 3
Limit monitor — 4
Table 1-5: Logic modules which can be programmed freely
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 1-15
System Description
1.6 Overview of system components

Devices
SIMOCODE pro
Connectable pro C pro V Application

system components (BU1) (BU2)
Operator panel (OP) Installation in the cabi-

net door. Additional
control station and
display. With system
interface for connec-
ting a PC
Current measurement modules (IM) Current measure-
0.3 A up to 3 A ment with push-
2.4 A up to 25 A through system. Basic
unit can be snapped
Current measurement modules (IM)
open
10 A up to 100 A

20 A up to 200 A ment with push-
through system or a
rail connection system
63 A up to 630 A ment with a rail con-
nection system
Current/voltage measurement Mounting only next to

modules (UM) * — the basic unit, other-
0.3 A up to 3 A wise similar to the
2.4 A up to 25 A current measurement
modules, also:
Current/voltage measurement
- voltage
modules (UM) * —
measurement
10 A up to 100 A
- power measurement
- power factor (cos
Current/voltage measurement phi) measurement
modules (UM) * — - phase cycle
20 A up to 200 A
Current/voltage measurement
modules (UM) * —
63 A up to 630 A
Table 1-6: System components, devices
SIMOCODE pro
1-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
SIMOCODE pro

system components (BU1) (BU2)
Digital modules (DM)

24 V DC monostable — Additional binary
110 V up to 240 V AC/DC monosta- inputs and outputs.
ble Maximum 2 DMs pos-
24 V DC bistable sible
110 V up to 240 V AC/DC bistable
Analog module (AM) * Additional inputting
— and outputting as well
as monitoring of ana-
log values
Earth-fault module (EM) * For connecting a
— 3UL22 external sum-
mation current trans-
former for earth-fault
monitoring
Temperature module (TM) * For monitoring tempe-
— rature via additional
Pt100, PT1000, KTY...
sensors
*
Available from the middle of 2005
Table 1-6: System components, devices (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 1-17
System Description
Accessories
SIMOCODE basic unit

system components
Connecting cable in 4 different For connecting

lengths ranging from 0.025 m up to system components
2m via system interfaces
System interface cover For covering system
interfaces not in use
Memory module For saving the device

parameters. In the
case of device repla-
cement, parameteriza-
tion without a PC
Addressing plug For configuring the
PROFIBUS DP
address without a PC
PC cable For connecting
SIMOCODE pro to a
PC
Door adapter For leading out the
system interface
e.g. from a switchgear
cabinet
Table 1-7: System components, accessories
Software
For parameterization, control, diagnostics and testing
SIMOCODE basic unit
Software components pro C pro V Application
SIMOCODE ES Smart Access via the system

interface on the
device
SIMOCODE ES Professional Access via the system
with Object Manager interface on the
OM SIMOCODE pro device and PROFI-
BUS DP
SIMOCODE ES Graphic * Graphical parameteri-
zation per
“Drag&Drop”
*
Available from the middle of 2005
Table 1-8: System components, software
SIMOCODE pro
1-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
1.7 Description of the system components

1.7.1 Basic units
The basic units are the fundamental components of the SIMOCODE pro
system. Basic units are always required when using SIMOCODE pro. They
have the same enclosure width of 45 mm and are equipped with detachable
terminals:
Basic unit 1 (BU1) Basic unit 2 (BU2)

SIMOCODE pro C device series SIMOCODE pro V device series
Figure 1-5: Basic units
Basic unit 1 (BU1)

Basic unit 1 is the fundamental component of the
SIMOCODE pro C device series. The following motor control functions are
supported:
• direct starters and reversing starters
• circuit breaker activation
Basic unit 2 (BU2)

Basic unit 2 is the fundamental component of the
SIMOCODE pro V device series. The following motor control functions are
supported:
• direct starters and reversing starters
• star-delta starters, also with reversal of the direction of rotation
• 2 speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing switches), also with
reversal of the direction of rotation
• 2 speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings, also with reversal of the
direction of rotation
• slide control
• valve control
• circuit breaker control
• soft starter control, also with reversal of the direction of rotation
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 1-19
System Description
Basic unit 2 offers the following options:

• increasing the device functionality if necessary using expansion modules of
22.5 mm width
• using a current/voltage measurement module instead of the current measure-
ment module used
• additional inputs and outputs if necessary
1.7.2 Operator panel (OP)
The operator panel is often integrated into the front panels of motor control
centers. It can be used with the SIMOCODE pro C device series as well as
with the SIMOCODE pro V device series. It contains all the status LEDs
which are on the basic units, the “test/reset” button and makes the system
interface externally available.
It also offers the option of controlling the motor feeder from the cabinet. For
this, the operator panel is equipped with
• 5 buttons, of which 4 can be parameterized freely
• 10 LEDs, of which 7 can be parameterized freely
The following figure shows an operator panel:
Operator panel Device series

SIMOCODE pro C
SIMOCODE pro V
Figure 1-6: Operator panel
The operator panel can be connected to the basic unit or to the expansion
module via the system interface on the back. The voltage is supplied by the
basic unit.
A PC with SIMOCODE ES or the memory module and the addressing plug
can be connected using the PC cable via the system interface on the front
(with a cover for IP54).
The power is supplied by the basic unit.
SIMOCODE pro
1-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
1.7.3 Current measurement modules (IM)
Current measurement modules are used with the basic units of the
SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V device series.
The current measurement module must be selected according to the set
current to be monitored (rated operating current of the motor). The current
measurement modules cover current ranges between 0.3 A and 630 A, with
interposing transformers up to 820 A.
The following figure shows the different current measurement modules:
Current measurement modules Device series

SIMOCODE pro C
SIMOCODE pro V
0.3A - 3A 10A - 100A

2.4A - 25A
20A - 200A 63A - 630A
Figure 1-7: Current measurement modules
The current measurement module is connected to the basic unit via a con-
necting cable which also supplies the power. Current measurement modu-
les up to 100 A are suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed
directly to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs. The basic units
can be snapped directly onto the current measurement modules. The cur-
rent measurement modules up to 200 A can also be mounted on the stan-
dard rail or, optionally, they can be fixed directly to the mounting plate with
the screw attachments which are integrated into the enclosure. The current
measurement module up to 630 A can only be mounted using the integra-
ted screw attachments.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 1-21
System Description
1.7.4 Current/voltage measurement modules (UM) for the SIMOCODE pro V

device series
The SIMOCODE pro V device series offers the option of using a current/
voltage measurement module instead of a current measurement module.
As well as the motor current, current/voltage measurement modules can
also
• monitor voltages up to 690 V
• evaluate and monitor the power and power factor (cos phi)
• monitor the phase cycle
The following figure shows the different current/voltage measurement
modules:
Current/ voltage measurement modules Device series

Monitoring voltages up to 690 V SIMOCODE pro V
0.3A - 3A 10A - 100A

2.4A - 25A
20A - 200A 63A - 630A
Figure 1-8: Current/voltage measurement modules
The current/voltage measurement module is connected to the basic device

via a connecting cable which also supplies the power. Current/voltage mea-
surement modules up to 100 A are suitable for standard rail mounting or can
be fixed directly to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs. The cur-
rent/voltage measurement modules up to 200 A can also be mounted on the
standard rail or, optionally, they can be fixed directly to the mounting plate
with the screw attachments which are integrated into the enclosure. Moun-
ting is only possible via the internal screw attachments for the current/
voltage measurement modules up to 630 A. Basic units can only be moun-
ted separately next to the current/voltage measurement modules.
SIMOCODE pro
1-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
1.7.5 Expansion modules for the SIMOCODE pro V device series
Expansion modules are intended as optional additions for the

SIMOCODE pro V device series. The following expansion modules are
available:
• digital modules (DM)
• analog module (AM)
• earth-fault module (EM)
• temperature module (TM)
All expansion modules have the same design with an enclosure width of
22.5 mm. They are equipped with 2 system interfaces (incoming/outgoing)
and detachable terminals.
The following figure shows an expansion module:
Expansion module Device series

SIMOCODE pro V
Figure 1-9: Expansion module
Digital modules (DM)

Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the types and number
of binary inputs and outputs on basic unit 2, if required.
For basic unit 2, the following digital modules are available:
Inputs Supply Outputs
4 inputs 24 V DC, external 2 monostable relay

outputs
4 inputs 110 ... 240 V AC/DC, external 2 monostable relay

outputs
4 inputs 24 V DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs
4 inputs 110 ... 240 V AC/DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs
Table 1-9: Variations of the digital modules
A maximum of two digital modules can be connected to basic unit 2, whe-

reby all versions listed here can be combined with each other.
SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of 12 binary inputs
and 7 relay outputs.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 1-23
System Description
Analog module (AM)

The analog module offers the option of expanding basic unit 2 by an analog
input (0/4-20 mA) and one analog output (0/4-20 mA). This makes it possible
to read, process and monitor analog signals. The analog values can be pro-
cessed internally and transmitted to the automation system. Any analog
signal of 0/4-20 mA can be outputted via the analog output.
• 1 analog module can be connected to BU2
• Analog input signal 0/4 to 20 mA
• Analog output signal 0/4 to 20 mA
Earth-fault modules (EM)

The earth-fault module offers the option of implementing powerful external
earth-fault monitoring in connection with the 3UL22 summation current
transformer (makes it possible to evaluate rated fault currents of 0.3 A, 0.5
A and 1 A). In addition to the internal earth-fault monitoring function, which
is supported by both device series, SIMOCODE pro V can be expanded by
an additional and more exact external earth-fault monitoring system.
• 1 earth-fault module can be connected to BU2
Temperature module (TM)

The temperature module offers the option of expanding the thermistor
motor protection for the SIMOCODE pro V device series by an analog tem-
perature monitoring system. With this, up to 3 analog sensor measuring cir-
cuits (three-wire system) can be evaluated. SIMOCODE pro V supports,
among others, the PTC, NTC, KTY sensor types as well as PT100 and
PT1000.
• 1 temperature module can be connected to BU2
Note:
All modules can be used/connected in any sequence.
SIMOCODE pro
1-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
1.7.6 Accessories
The following figure shows accessories which are independent of the device
series:
PC cable Addressing plug Device series

SIMOCODE pro C
SIMOCODE pro V
Memory module
Door adapter
Connecting cable
System interface
cover
Figure 1-10: Accessories
PC cable
for the device parameterization, for connecting a PC to the system interface
of a basic unit via its serial interface.
Memory module
for plugging onto the system interface and for fast reading in or out of the
entire SIMOCODE pro parameterization, e.g. in the case of a unit replace-
ment (for this, see chapter "Replace SIMOCODE pro components" on page
12-9).
Addressing plug
for the “hardware” transfer of the PROFIBUS DP address to a basic unit wit-
hout a PC/programming device.
Connecting cable
in different lengths (0.025 m, 0.1 m, 0.5 m, 2.0 m) which are required for
connecting the individual basic units with their current modules and, if
necessary, with their expansion modules or operator panel. The total length
of all connecting cables must not exceed 3 m per system!
Door adapter
for making the system interface of a basic unit available at an easily accessi-
ble location (e.g. front panel), thus guaranteeing fast parameterization.
System interface cover

to protect the system interfaces from dirt or to seal them. In normal opera-
tion, system interfaces which are not used must be closed.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 1-25
System Description
1.7.7 Software
SIMOCODE pro offers different software tools for thorough, time-saving

parameterization, configuration and diagnostics:
SIMOCODE ES
SIMOCODE ES is the standard parameterization software for
SIMOCODE pro, which is runnable on a PC/programming device under Win-
dows 2000 or Windows XP. It is available in 2 versions:
• SIMOCODE ES Smart, for directly connecting the PC/programming device
(serial interface) to SIMOCODE pro with a PC cable via the system interface
on the device (point to point)
• SIMOCODE ES Professional, for connecting one or more devices via
PROFIBUS DP and/or with PC cable via the system interface on the device
Object Manager OM SIMOCODE pro

Part of SIMOCODE ES Professional. When SIMOCODE ES Professional and
the OM SIMOCODE pro are installed on a PC/programming device,
SIMOCODE ES Professional can be called directly from Step7 HW configu-
ration. Thus, a simple and thorough SIMATIC-S7 configuration is made pos-
sible.
PCS 7 library SIMOCODE pro
With the PCS-7 library SIMOCODE pro, SIMOCODE pro can be connected
easily and conveniently to the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system.
The PCS-7 library SIMOCODE pro contains
• the corresponding diagnostic and driver blocks with the diagnostic and driver
concept of SIMATIC PCS 7
• the elements necessary for operator control and process monitoring (sym-
bols and faceplate)
Attention!
Please observe the respective system versions!
GSD File
for the integration into SIMATIC S7 or into any DP standard master system
(automation system). The GSD file is on the SIMOCODE ES CD ROM in the
“GSD” directory. You will find the current German version on the Internet
under
http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_d/gsd (under Schaltgeräte, i.e. switchgear).
You will find further information on the integration of DP slaves in the docu-
mentation for the automation system.
Win SIMOCODE DP Converter

is a software tool for converting “old” Win SIMOCODE DP parameter files
(3UF5 device series) into SIMOCODE ES parameter files for
SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE pro
1-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
System Description
1.8 Structural configuration of SIMOCODE pro

1.8.1 Function blocks
Characteristics
In the SIMOCODE pro system, there are internal function blocks e.g. for
control stations, control functions and motor protection.
Every function block has a name and is equipped with inputs and outputs.
The following table shows the possible inputs/outputs:
Input Symbol Example
Plugs (digital) Function blocks in the basic unit can have digital
plugs. These are connected via software to digital
sockets. They are relevant for the parameterization
e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.
Plugs (analog) Function blocks in the basic unit can have analog
plugs. These are connected via software to analog
sockets. They are relevant for the parameterization
e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.
Example: 2-byte word for cyclic signaling data.
Screw terminals Screw terminals are outside e.g. function block “BU -
input”. Control devices and auxiliary switches are
usually connected there.
Control data from From the DP master to SIMOCODE pro e.g. function
PROFIBUS DP DP block “cyclic control data”.
Output Symbol Example
Sockets (digital) Function blocks in the basic devices can have digital
sockets. These are assigned via software to digital
plugs. They are relevant for the parameterization e.g.
with SIMOCODE ES.
Sockets (analog) Function blocks in the basic devices can have sok-
kets. Sockets are assigned via software to analog
plugs. They are relevant for the parameterization e.g.
with SIMOCODE ES.
Example: 2-byte word max. current I_max.
Screw terminals Screw terminals are outside e.g. function block “BU -
output”. Contactors, for example, are connected
there.
Signaling data to From SIMOCODE pro to the DP master e.g. function
PROFIBUS DP DP block “cyclic signaling data”.
Table 1-10: Possible inputs/outputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 1-27
System Description
Schematic of principle structural configuration

The following function block diagram shows the principal configuration of a
SIMOCODE pro basic unit:
BU
external BU internal
Inputs Outputs Inputs Outputs Inputs Outputs

(terminals) (sockets) (plugs) (sockets) (plugs) (terminals)
BU input Function block A BU output
1 1
IN1 Standard function OUT1
2 2
IN2 Function block C OUT2
3 3
IN3 OUT3
4 4
IN4
Standard function
Cyclic Function block B Cyclic

control data signaling data
Bit 0.0 Bit 0.0
To the DP
Control function
From the DP Bit 0.1 Bit 0.1 Master
Master Function block D
DP Bit 0.2 Bit 0.2 DP
Logic function
PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DP
Figure 1-11: Principal configuration of a SIMOCODE-pro basic unit
Connecting plugs with sockets
Note
The plugs and sockets of the function blocks have not already been connec-
ted at the factory with the binary inputs and the relay outputs of the basic
unit.
The internal wiring (connecting the plugs and sockets) is determined by the user
according to his respective application. *)
Attention!
If external wiring has already been carried out, but SIMOCODE pro was not
yet parameterized:
If you now press a button, the contactors will not be activated!
*) If you select an application in SIMOCODE ES, e.g. reversing starter, all

links and interlocks for the reversing starter are created in the basic unit.
SIMOCODE pro
1-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Short Instructions for Configuring
a Reversing Starter 2
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find short instructions for configuring a reversing
starter including an example. Most of the parameters are appropriately set
as factory defaults for most of the applications. Only a few parameters have
to be set.
Target groups
• planners
• configurators
• mechanics
• electricians
• commissioners.
Necessary knowledge
• basic knowledge about SIMOCODE pro (see chapter 1 “System Description”)
• basic knowledge of the SIMOCODE ES parameterization software.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 2-1
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
2.1 Introduction and target of the example

Introduction
The following simple example of a reversing starter demonstrates step-by-
step how to work with SIMOCODE pro. In this context, the reversing starter
will be equipped with
• a local control station
• and then with a second control station with PROFIBUS DP
The SIMOCODE ES software is used for parameterization.

The PC/programming device is connected to the basic unit via PC cable.
Target of the example

This example is intended to
1. Show you how to implement a standard switching operation of a reversing
starter with SIMOCODE pro in only a few steps
2. Help you modify this example for your respective application
3. Help you easily implement other applications
Important steps
The two important steps with SIMOCODE are always:
• implementation of the external wiring (for control and feedback of main cur-
rent switching devices and control and signaling devices)
• implementation/activation of internal SIMOCODE functions, with control and
analysis of the SIMOCODE inputs/outputs (internal SIMOCODE wiring).
Conditions
• Load feeder/motor present
• PLC/DCS control with PROFIBUS DP interface is present
• The main circuit for the reversing circuit including the current measurement
module is already wired. In this case, the 3 cables leading to the motor must
be led through the push-through system openings of the current measure-
ment module.
• PC/programming device is present
• The SIMOCODE ES software is installed
• The basic unit has the basic factory default settings. In chapter "Configuring
the basic factory default setting" on page 12-10 you will learn how to imple-
ment the basic factory default settings.
SIMOCODE pro
2-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
2.2 Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control

station
Necessary components
The following table shows the components that are required for
this example:
Item Ordering data Order number
1 SIMOCODE pro C basic unit 3UF7000-1AU00-0

(SIMOCODE pro V also possible) (3UF7000-1AU00-0)
2 Current measurement module 0.3 A up to 3 A 3UF7000-1AU00-0
3 Connecting cable for connecting the basic unit and 3UF7000-1AU00-0

the current measurement module, depending on
the length
4 “SIMOCODE ES Smart” or 3ZS1 312-1CC10-0YA0

“SIMOCODE ES Professional” software for parame-
terization via the system interface
(also “SIMOCODE ES Professional” software (3ZS1 312-2CC10-0YA0)
for parameterization via PROFIBUS and the system
interface, including STEP-7 Object Manager possible)
5 PC cable for connecting the basic device to a PC/ pro- 3UF7000-1AU00-0

gramming device
6 PROFIBUS DP cable
Table 2-1: Components needed for the example
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 2-3
Circuitry of the reversing starter with SIMOCODE pro

The following schematic shows the circuitry of the main circuit and the con-
trol circuit:
Main circuit Control circuit

3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 V
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
L1/L+
1 3 5
Q1 F11
2 4 6 S0 S1 S2
3 push-through Current measurement A1 A2 IN1 IN2 IN3 24 V

system openings Basic unit (BU)
module (IM)
System System
Connecting cable
interface interface
OUT1 OUT2 1
1 3 5 1 3 5
K1 K2
- K1 - K2 N/L–
2 4 6 2 4 6
PE U V W
Motor, motor rated current e.g. 3 A
M ϑ CLASS 10
3~
Optional: thermistor
Figure 2-1: Circuitry of the main circuit and the control circuit with SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
2-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Circuit diagram of the control circuit of a reversing starter

The following schematic shows the circuit diagram of the control circuit with
a local control station for the commands
• LEFT
• OFF
• RIGHT.
Displays, signals, etc. are not taken into account.
Standard reversing starter Reversing starter w. SIMOCODE pro
L1/L+ L1/L+
Necessary interlocks F11

S1
and links
S0 S1 S2
A1 A2 IN1 IN2 IN3 24 V

S0 K1 S2 K2
Basic unit (BU)
K2 K1
OUT1 OUT2 1
K1 K2 K1 K2
N/L– N/L–
S0: “LEFT” button K1: contactor clockwise rotation

S1: “OFF” button K2: contactor counterclockwise rotation
S2: “RIGHT” button
Figure 2-2: Circuit diagram of the control circuit of a reversing starter
The necessary interlocks and links are carried out via the software in the
basic unit.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 2-5
2.3 Parameterization
The basics of parameterization
After the external connections have been carried out (contactor coils con-
nected, current measurement module integrated in the main circuit), the
second step is the parameterization of SIMOCODE pro.
For this you need to know the following points:
Point Description
1 Function blocks are stored internally in the SIMOCODE pro system, e.g. for
control stations and control functions with motor protection.
2 Function blocks have names.
3 Function blocks can have settings, e.g. the control function and the set cur-
rent. In the example: control function “reversing starter” and set current 3 A.
4 Function blocks have inputs and outputs. These are clearly designated.
5 You have to do the following in order to achieve the desired functionality:
• connect the function blocks by connecting specific plugs to specific sockets
(i.e put the plugs in the sockets)
• if required, set the values in the function blocks, e.g. the set current,
type of control function
6 The inputs of the function blocks in the basic device are designated and labe-
led as plugs:
7 The outputs of the function blocks in the basic device are designated and
labeled as sockets:
8 Plugs and sockets of the inputs and outputs of the devices are not connected
as factory defaults. If you press a button now, the contactors are not activa-
ted.
Figure 2-3: Schematic of the different function blocks in SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
2-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
General procedure for parameterizing a reversing starter

Parameterization means:
1. Setting values
2. Linking function blocks
In the example, this means the following:
• you must choose the control function “reversing starter” to implement all
interlocks and links in the basic device for the reversing starter.
• you have to determine the set current Ie in the function block “Motor Protec-
tion”. In this case, the set current corresponds to the motor rated current,
here 3 A.
• the “BU - output” function block must be connected to the sockets of the
“control/contactor” function block via the software. This means
– connect BU - output 1 to socket contactor control QE1 (right)
– connect BU - output 2 to socket contactor control QE2 (left)
• the plugs of the “control/contactors” function block must be connected to
the sockets of the “BU - input” function block via the software. This means
– connect local control station [LC] ON< to socket BU - input 1
– connect local control station [LC] OFF to socket BU - input 2
– connect local control station [LC] ON> to socket BU - input 3
SIMOCODE pro
• Connect • Choose a reversing starter • Connect

digital inputs • Determine Ie relay outputs
BU - inputs BU - outputs
Control/contactors QE1 1 Right
1 ON<
QE2 2
2 OFF
3 Ie = 3 A
ON> Left
Local control station [LC] Contactor controls
Figure 2-4: Schematic of parameterization in the example
The assignment of the contactor controls QE* depends on the parameteri-

zed control function. See chapter 4 "Active control stations, contactor &
lamp controls and status signal of the control functions"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 2-7
Concrete procedure for parameterization with SIMOCODE ES
Carry out the following steps:
Step Description
1 Start SIMOCODE ES on your PC/programming device.

2 Choose the control function “reversing starter” as the application. When you
select this application, a range of presettings will be automatically carried out
that you will have to check later.
3 Under “Device configuration”, select either SIMOCODE pro C or
SIMOCODE pro V. Deactivate the operator panel if not present.
4 Open the dialog Device parameters > Motor protection > Overload/ asymmetry/
blocking . Set the set current Ie1 to 3A.
5 Open the dialog Further function blocks > Outputs > Basic device and check the
following settings:
• contactor control > contactor control QE1.
• contactor control > contactor control QE2.
The relay outputs are connected BU - output

to the contactor controls. Control/contactors QE1 1
QE2 2
Note:
By choosing a preset application (step 2), other presettings might be made
when assigning the BU outputs to the contactor controls.
6 Open the dialog Device parameters> Motor control > Control stations and check
the following settings:
• local control [LC] ON<: BU - input 1
• local control [LC] OFF: BU - input 2
• local control [LC] ON>: BU - input 3
BU - input The control station
Control/contactors is now connected “locally” with
1 ON< the digital inputs.
2 Off
3 ON>
Check if the releases for “ON” and “OFF” for the operating mode “local2”
are set.
7 Parameterization is finished. Store the parameter file on your PC/ pro-
gramming device using Switchgear > Save.
Table 2-2: Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES
SIMOCODE pro
2-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Transferring the parameters to the basic device and commissioning

After creating the parameter file, you can transfer it to SIMOCODE pro and
start up the reversing starter. To do this, execute the following steps:
Step Description
1 Switch on the voltage supply of the basic device.

2 Connect the serial interface of the PC/programming device and the system
interface of the basic unit with the PC cable.
3 Observe the status LEDs on the basic unit. The “Device” LED must light up
green. SIMOCODE pro can be started up.
4 Transfer the parameter file to the basic unit via the menu e.g. using
Target system > Load in switchgear. Choose the RS232 interface with which
SIMOCODE pro is connected to the PC via the PC cable.
5 After having transferred the data to the basic device, you will receive the
message “Download to the switchgear finished successfully”.
Table 2-3: Transferring the parameters to the basic unit and commissioning
Attention
In this example, switching between “right” and “left” is only possible via
“OFF” and after expiration of the preset interlocking time of 5 seconds.
Configuration with local control station is finished

The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now finished. You now have a
functional reversing starter with a local control station.
If the wiring and parameterization is correct, the contactors for clockwise
and counterclockwise rotation are activated when the corresponding but-
tons are pushed.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 2-9
2.4 Extending the reversing starter with a control station

via PROFIBUS DP
In this section
In this section you will find out how the previously configured example can
be extended by one control station via PROFIBUS DP. You have the option of
using either the local control stations (local control) or PLC/ DCS (remote
control). This enables SIMOCODE pro to be controlled locally via buttons as
well as via PLC/ DCS.
The necessary connections are preset as factory defaults in
SIMOCODE pro. For this reason, you only have to set the PROFIBUS DP
address for SIMOCODE pro so that it can be recognized correctly as a DP
slave on the PROFIBUS DP.
Conditions
The following conditions must be fulfilled:
• the motor is switched off
• the supply voltage for the basic device is switched on. The “Device” LED
must light up green
• you connected the basic unit to the PROFIBUS DP. The PROFIBUS DP inter-
face is on the front side (9-pole SUB-D socket)
• you have integrated SIMOCODE pro in your automatization system.
You will find further information on the integration of DP slaves in the docu-
mentation for the automation system.
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

First you have to set the PROFIBUS DP address of the basic unit. The follo-
wing option are available:
• via the addressing plug
• via SIMOCODE ES.
SIMOCODE pro
2-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES

Step Description
1 Plug the PC cable into the system interface.

2 Start SIMOCODE ES.
3 Open the menu Switchgear > Open online.
4 Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface.
Press OK to confirm.
5 Open the dialog Device parameters> Bus parameters.
6 Select the DP address.
7 Save the data in the basic unit with
Target system > Load to switchgear. The address is set. Confirm the
change of the address.
Table 2-4: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug

Step Description
1 Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch.

The switches are numbered.
Example address 21: Put the switches “16”+“4”+“1” in the “ON position”.
2 If necessary, pull the PC cable out of the system interface.
3 Plug the addressing plug in the system interface.
The “Device” LED lights up yellow.
4 Briefly press the test/ reset button. The set address is accepted. The
“Device” LED blinks yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
5 Pull the addressing plug from the system interface.
Table 2-5: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 2-11
Additional internal components of the basic unit

The control local control station [LC] is already wired, the external compon-
ents are connected and the required internal connections have been carried
out.
The following additional internal components that are already connected as
factory defaults and do not have to be parameterized are required:
• PROFIBUS DP bit 0.0, bit 0.1 and bit 0.2 for the commands “LEFT”, “OFF”
and “RIGHT”
• PROFIBUS DP bit 0.5 for the switching between the control stations (local)
and the PLC/DCS (remotely)
– Bit0.5=0: local control station [LC] active
– Bit0.5=0: PLC/ DCS [DP] control station active.
The PLC/DCS [DP] control station and the switch-over (plug) are already con-
nected with the bits (sockets) as factory defaults. The assignments can be
found in SIMOCODE ES under
Device parameters > Motor control > Control stations.
SIMOCODEpro
BU - input Control stations BU - output

1
1 QE1 Right
LEFT
2
2 QE2
OFF
3
RIGHT Left
Cyclic Cyclic
PROFIBUS DP control data Bit0.0 Status signaling data
Bit0.0
LEFT ON<
Bit0.1 Bit0.1
DP
OFF OFF DP
Bit0.2 Bit0.2
RIGHT ON>
Bit0.5
S1
Figure 2-5: Schematic of internal components of the basic unit for the example
All pre-assigned cyclic signaling data is not shown.

The assignments can be found in SIMOCODE ES under
Additional function blocks > Outputs > Cyclic signaling data
Configuration with PLC/ DCS [DP] control station is finished

The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now finished. You now have a
reversing starter with an additional control station via PROFIBUS DP.
The contactors for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation are controlled
by setting the corresponding bits.
SIMOCODE pro
2-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Protection 3
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on motor protection.
Motor protection includes
• overload protection
• asymmetry protection
• blocking protection
• thermistor protection.
Unlike motor control, motor protection functions “in the background”. All
parameters of the motor protection are explained. They can be active or not
depending on the chosen control function.
Target groups
• configurators
• commissioners.
Necessary knowledge
• good knowledge about SIMOCODE pro
• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets
• knowledge of electrical drive engineering.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:
Device parameters > Motor protection.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 3-1
Motor Protection
3.1 Introduction
Description
The motor protection functions “overload protection”, “asymmetry protec-
tion”, “blocking protection” and “thermistor protection” are explained in the
chapters 3.2 to 3.4.
Schematic diagram
The following schematic diagram shows the function circuit diagram of the
motor protection functions “overload protection”, “asymmetry protection”
and “blocking protection” with optional parameter settings and signals.
Control function/motor protection
Overload protection
QE1
QE2
Set current Ie1 Switching
off QE3
Set current Ie2 QE4
QE5
Class 5,10, ... 40
Response at pre-warning level See Signal:

table 3-1
- Overload
Extended parameters:
- Overload + phase failure
Reset (manual, automatic) - Pre-warning overload
- Cooling down time active
Load type (3-ph., 1-ph.)
- Pause time active
Current
Pause time - Emergency start active
- Time to switching off (analog)

Cooling down time
- Heating up motor model (analog)
- Remaining cooling down time (analog)
Response at trip level See
table 3-1 - Last tripping current (analog)
Asymmetry protection
Asymmetry protection level See - Asymmetry

table 3-1
Blocking protection
Blocking protection level See - Blocking

table 3-1
Figure 3-1: Motor protection functions
SIMOCODE pro
3-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Protection
Adjustable responses “Overload protection”, “Asymmetry protection” and “Blocking

protection”
Response At pre-warning At trip At “asymme- At “blocking

level level try” protection”
level level
Deactivated X X X X
Signal X X X X
Warn X (d) X X (d) X
Switch off - X (d) X X (d)
Delay 0 ... 25.5 s - 0 ... 25.5 s 0 ... 25.5 s
Table 3-1: Adjustable responses “Overload protection”, “Asymmetry protection” and “Blocking
protection”
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 3-3
Motor Protection
3.2 Overload protection

Description
SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase and AC motors in compliance with
IEC 60947-4-1. The tripping class can be set to 8 different settings ranging
from class 5 to class 40. Therefore, the switch off time can be adjusted very
precisely to the start-up time of the motor which allows the motor to be bet-
ter used to capacity. The interval up to the overload tripping is also calcula-
ted and can be put at the disposal of the control system. After an overload
tripping, the remaining cooling down time can be displayed.
Set current Ie1

The motor rated current is usually set with the set current Ie1. This value is
listed on the type plate of the motor. It is the basis for calculating the over-
load tripping characteristic curve.
Range: depends on the desired current measurement module
Set current Ie1 0.3 A up to 3A
2.4 A up to 25 A
10 A up to 100 A
20 A up to 200 A
63 A up to 630 A
Set current Ie2

The current setting Ie2 is only necessary for motors with 2 speeds in order
to also guarantee suitable overload protection for the second speed as well.
Range: depends on the desired current measurement module
Set current Ie2: 0.3 A up to 3A
2.4 A up to 25 A
10 A up to 100 A
20 A up to 200 A
63 A up to 630 A
Attention
Please make sure that both current settings are in the same range. Other-
wise, you should use an additional 3U18 current transformer.
SIMOCODE pro
3-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Protection
Class
The class (tripping class) indicates the maximum tripping time in which
SIMOCODE must trip cold with the 7.2-fold set current Ie (motor protection
according to IEC 60947). Please take into account that with start-ups >
“Class 10”, the admissible AC3 current of the contactor must be reduced
(derating), which means that a larger contactor must be used.
The following diagram shows the tripping classes 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35
and 40 for a 3-pole symmetric load:
1,15
Figure 3-2: Switch-off classes for 3-pole symmetric loads
Range:
Class: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 3-5
Motor Protection
The following diagram shows the tripping classes 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35
and 40 for a 2-pole load:
0,85
Figure 3-3: Switch-off classes for 2-pole load
Range:
Class: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40
Response in case of overload

The response of SIMOCODE pro can be additionally adjusted in case of
overload:
Further information: see “Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro” in chapter
"Important Notes" and the table “Responses” in chapter 3.1 "Introduction".
Attention
With motors for EEx e applications the response must remain set to “switch
off”!
SIMOCODE pro
3-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Protection
Cooling time
The cooling down time is the specified time after which an overload tripping
can be reset. It is usually five minutes.
Supply voltage failures of SIMOCODE during this time correspondingly
extend the specified time.
Range:
Cooling down time: 60 up to 6553.5 seconds
Pause time
The pause time is the specified time for the cooling response of the motor
when switching off under normal operating conditions (not in the case of
overload tripping!). After this interval, the thermal memory in
SIMOCODE pro is deleted and a new cold start is possible. Due to this, fre-
quent start-ups within a short period of time are possible.
The following schematic shows the cooling off response with and without a
pause time:
Motor
ON
OFF
t
Without pause time
υ Trip limit
Overload tripping
With pause time

υ Trip limit
No overload tripping
t
Pause time
Thermal memory will be deleted after the pause time
Figure 3-4: Cooling down response with and without pause time
Attention
The motor and the switchgear must be dimensioned specifically for this
load!
Range:
Pause time: 0 up to 6553.5 seconds
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 3-7
Motor Protection
Load type
You can choose whether SIMOCODE pro is to protect a 1-phase or 3-phase
load. The internal earth-fault detection must be deactivated. The phase
failure monitoring is deactivated automatically.
Range:
Load type: 1-phase, 3-phase
Delay pre-warning
The “delay” parameter is used to determine the interval during which the
pre-warning level (1.15 x Ie) must be constantly exceeded before
SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise, there is no
reaction.
In case of phase failure or asymmetry > 50%, this pre-warning is already
issued at approx. 0.85 x Ie.
Reset
If the “reset” parameter is set to “automatic”, the “overload”, “overload +
asymmetry” and “thermistor” faults are acknowledged automatically
• if the cooling down time has expired
• if the thermistor value has decreased to the resetting value according to spe-
cification
If the “reset” parameter is set to “automatic”, the errors must be acknow-

ledged by a reset signal:
• “reset” button on the basic unit
• “reset” button on the operator panel
• “reset” standard function modules.
For this reason, the “reset - input” inputs (plugs) must be connected to the
corresponding sockets, e.g. using reset via the bus.
Range:
Reset: Manual, automatic
SIMOCODE pro
3-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Protection
3.3 Asymmetry monitoring

Description
The extent of the phase asymmetry can be monitored and transmitted to
the control system. A definable and delayable response can be tripped
when an adjustable limit is exceeded. If the phase asymmetry is greater
than 50%, a reduction of the tripping time according to the overload charac-
teristic curve takes place automatically since the heat development in
motors increases with asymmetric conditions.
Limit
The limit of the asymmetry to which SIMOCODE pro is to react when overs-
hot is set here.
Range:
Limit: 0 to 100%
Response
Here you can choose the response of SIMOCODE pro in case of phase
asymmetry:
See “Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro” in chapter "Important Notes"
and the table “Responses” in chapter 3.1 "Introduction".
Asymmetry protection - delay

The asymmetry limit must be exceeded for the period of the set delay time
before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise, there is
no reaction.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 3-9
Motor Protection
3.4 Blocking protection

Description
After the motor current exceeds an adjustable blocking limit (current limit), a
definable and delayable response can be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro.
For example, the motor can be set to switch off quickly independently of the
overload protection. The blocking protection is only active after the parame-
terized class interval has elapsed, e.g. for class 10 after 10 seconds. The
blocking protection prevents the motor from unnecessary high thermal and
mechanical load as well as premature deterioration.
Limit
After exceeding the blocking limit, SIMOCODE pro reacts according to the
specified response.
Range:
Limit: 0 up to 1020% of Ie
Response
Here you can determine the response to be executed when the blocking
limit is exceeded:
See “Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro” in chapter "Important Notes"
and the table “Responses” in chapter 3.1 "Introduction".
Delay
The “delay” parameter is used to specify the time interval. The blocking
level must constantly be exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the
desired response. Otherwise there is no reaction.
SIMOCODE pro
3-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Protection
3.5 Temperature monitoring

Description
Temperature monitoring is based on a direct temperature measurement in
the motor. Temperature monitoring is used for:
• motors with high switching frequencies
• converter operation
• intermittent operation and/or during braking
• a restricted air supply
• speeds that are lower than the rated speed
In this case, the sensors are mounted in the winding slot or in the bearings
of the motor.
Characteristic curves
SIMOCODE pro provides the option of connecting two completely different
types of sensors:
Sensor Type:
Binary Temperature monitoring via binary PTC thermi-

stors that can be connected to basic unit 1 or
R
basic unit 2. The resistance of the thermistors
increases rapidly when the limit temperature is
reached.
υ
PTC
Analog Temperature monitoring via analog temperature

sensors like NTC, KTY83/84, PT100, PT1000 that
R R
are connected to the optional temperature
module (T module). They have a characteristic
1 2 υ 1 2 υ
curve that changes almost linearly when the tem-
perature rises. For this reason, separate limits
PT / KTY NTC
can be set for the warning temperature and the
switch off temperature.
Figure 3-5: Characteristic curves of temperature sensors
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 3-11
Motor Protection
Schematic
The following schematic shows the function circuit diagram of temperature
monitoring:
Thermistor protection (binary)

QE1
R
QE2
Activation Switching
(in device configuration) off QE3
u
QE4
Response at trip limit see QE5
table 3-2
Thermistor
input Signal:
BU
- Thermistor trip limit
Response to sensor fault see
table 3-2 - Thermistor short circuit
- Thermistor wire break
Figure 3-6: Temperature monitoring
“Thermistor protection, binary” response

• Overtemperature:
Here you can choose the SIMOCODE pro response to be executed if the tem-
perature exceeds the trip limit.
Attention
With motors for EEx e applications, the response must remain set to
“switch off”!
• Sensor error (sensor circuit error):

Here you can choose the SIMOCODE pro response to be executed if there is
a short circuit or a wire break in the thermistor sensor cable.
See also “Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro” in chapter "Important
Notes".
Response Trip limit T> Sensor fault
Deactivated - X
Signal X X
Warn X X
Switch off X X
Table 3-2: “Thermistor protection, binary” response
SIMOCODE pro
3-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control 4
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on
• control stations which you can select and enable according to need. The follo-
wing related topics are explained:
– how control stations, modes of operation and enables work together
– how control commands e.g. “ON”, “OFF” are switched through to the
control function
• control functions you can select according to need. The following related
topics are explained:
– how control commands e.g. “ON”, “OFF” are switched through from the
control stations to the contactor controls/relay outputs
– which parameters apply depending on the control function chosen
Target groups
• configurators
• PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge
You need knowledge about:
• electrical drive engineering
• motor protection.
Device parameter > Motor control.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-1
Motor Control
4.1 Control stations

4.1.1 Description
Control stations are places from which control commands are given to the
motor. SIMOCODE pro supports four different control stations:
• Local, in the direct vicinity of the motor. Control commands are issued via
pushbutton.
• PLC/DCS, switching commands are issued by the automation system
(remote).
• PC, control commands are issued via an operator control station or via
PROFIBUS DPV1 with the SIMOCODE ES software.
• Operator panel, control commands are issued via the buttons of the operator
panel in the switchgear cabinet door.
Control commands can be e.g:
– motor on (ON<), motor off (OFF) for a direct starter
– motor left (ON<), motor off (OFF), motor right (ON>) for a reversing starter
– motor slow (ON<), motor fast (ON<<) , motor off (OFF) for a Dahlander circuit
The inputs (plugs) must be connected to arbitrary sockets (e.g. device

inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.) for the control commands to
take effect.
Control stations contain:

• 5 inputs (plugs ON<<, ON<, OFF, ON >, ON>>). The number of active
inputs depends on the control function chosen. A direct starter, for
example, has only the inputs “ON>” and “OFF” active.
SIMOCODE pro
4-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Control stations
• Control station - local control
In this case, the control devices are usually in the direct vicinity of the motor
and are wired to the inputs of SIMOCODE pro. The inputs (plugs) must be
connected to arbitrary sockets (normally device inputs) for the control com-
mands to take effect.
Attention
The OFF command “LC OFF” is 0-active. Therefore, it is guaranteed that
SIMOCODE pro switches off the motor safely e.g. in case of a wire break in
the supply cable. The precondition is that the control station is active.
Pushbutton BU input Local [LC]

ON<<
To
1 ON< enable
IN1
2 OFF
IN2
ON>
IN3 3
4 ON>>
IN4
• Control station - PLC/DCS

This control station is primarily intended for control commands from the auto-
mation system (PLC/DCS) via the cyclic control telegram of PROFIBUS DP.
The inputs (plugs) must be connected to arbitrary sockets (normally
PROFIBUS DP bits) for the control commands to take effect.
Cycl. cont. data PLC/DCS [DPV1]

ON<<
Bit 0.0
PLC To
ON< enable
OFF
DP Number: 16
ON>
ON>>
Bit 1.7
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-3
Motor Control
• Control station - PC
This control station is primarily intended for switching commands on an arbi-
trary PC which, along with the automation system, is used as a second
master on the PROFIBUS DP. The control commands are sent via the acyclic
control telegram from PROFIBUS DPV1.
Attention
If the SIMOCODE ES Professional/SIMATIC PDM PC software is connec-
ted to SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP, its control commands automati-
cally take effect via the PC[DPV1] control station. No additional paramete-
rization is necessary.
Acycl. cont. data PC [DPV1]

ON<<
Bit 0.0 To
PC enable
ON<
OFF
DP Number: 16
ON>
ON>>
Bit 1.7
• Control station - operator panel

This control station is primarily intended for control commands issued via the
buttons of the 3UF72 operator panel which is e.g. mounted in a switchgear
cabinet door. The inputs (plugs) must be connected to arbitrary sockets (nor-
mally buttons of the operator panel) for the control commands to take effect.
Attention
Since the operator panel only has 4 buttons for controlling the motor feeder,
one button must be used as a speed switch button for control functions with
2 rotational speeds and 2 directions of rotation.
For this purpose, the button must be assigned to the internal control com-
mand “[OP]<>/ <<>>”.
Attention
If the SIMOCODE ES PC-Software is connected to SIMOCODE pro via
the system interface, the control commands automatically take effect via
the control station operator panel (OP). No additional parameterization is
necessary.
OP buttons <>/<<>> Op. panel [OP]

To
Operator ON< enable
panel
OFF
ON>
ON>>
SIMOCODE pro
4-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
4.1.2 Modes of operation and mode selectors
Modes of operation
You can use the control stations either individually or in combination. There
are four different modes of operation you can switch between:
• local 1
• local 2
• local 3
• remote/automatic
In this mode of operation, the communication must be carried out via PLC.
Not all control stations are usually connected. If more than one control sta-
tion (e.g local and PLC/DCS) is connected, it makes sense and is also man-
datory to operate the control stations selectively. Four modes of operation
are provided for this purpose which can be selected via two control signals
(mode selectors). For each individual control station in every mode of opera-
tion, it can be stipulated if “ON commands” and/or “OFF commands” are to
be used. The modes of operation are controlled in multiplex operation, i.e.
only one mode of operation is active at any one time.
Example:
There are three modes of operation in a system:
Mode of operation Description

Key-operated switch ope- Only local control entries are admissible!
ration, All other control stations are locked.
e.g. local 1
Manual operation, Only operator panel control commands and local control
e.g. local 3 commands can be issued.
Remote operation, Only PLC/DCS control commands are permitted; locally, only
e.g. remote/automatic OFF commands are permitted.
Table 4-1: Modes of operation
The key-operated switch must be read in via an input to select these modes
of operation. The remote switching operation should be controlled via the
bus. The key-operated switch operation has priority over all other modes of
operation.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-5
Motor Control
Mode selectors
The S1/S2 mode selectors are used to switch between the “local1”, “local2”,
“local3” and “remote/automatic” modes of operation. The inputs (S1 and
S2 plugs) must be connected to arbitrary sockets (e.g. device inputs, control
bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.) for this.
The following table shows the modes of operation, depending on the signal
status of the S1 and S2 mode selectors:
Mode of operation
Input
Local 1 Local 2 Local 3 Remote/
automatic
S1 0 0 1 1
S2 0 1 0 1
Table 4-2: Modes of operation depending on S1 and S2
Switch authorizations for the individual control stations (local control [LC],
PLC/DCS [DP], PC [DPV1], operator panel (OP)) can be set with the different
modes of operation for enabling the control stations. The modes of opera-
tion are operated via the mode selector in the multiplex. This means that
only one mode of operation is always valid, controlled via the signals S1 and
S2 (column).
Example for a dynamic mode of operation in relationship to time:
S1 0 1 1 1 0
S2 0 1 0 1 0
Key- Remote operation Manual operation Remote operation Key-

operated switch operated switch
Local 1 Remote Local 3 Remote Local 1
0 Time t
Figure 4-1: Example - modes of operation
SIMOCODE pro
4-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Operator enable of the individual control stations

The following diagram shows the operator enable of an individual control
station:
Single control station

Inputs Simplified diagram
I O
of the single control station
ON<<
4 4
ON< ON I
OFF OFF O
ON>
ON: ON>>, ON>,
ON<, ON<<,
ON>>
E1...4
I
Local control [LC]
OFF
O
E1...4
I
PLC/DCS [DP]
OFF
O
E1...4
I
PC [DPV1]
OFF
O
E1...4
I
Operator panel (OP) OFF
O
Figure 4-2: Operator enable of a single control station
The following is enabled:
E : all ON commands
A : OFF command
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-7
Motor Control
4.1.3 Enables and enabled control command
Enables
Enables for the control commands “ON” and “OFF”, which must be activa-
ted, are assigned to each single control station for every mode of operation.
The corresponding checkbox is activated in the dialog “Control stations” in
SIMOCODE ES.
Enabled control command
The control commands are switched through to the function block “Enabled
control command”. The control function, e.g. reversing starter, is usually
controlled with this function block’s sockets.
Enables and enabled control command schematic
The following diagram shows the control stations and modes of operation:
Mode selector
S1
0 0 1 1
S2
0 1 0 1
Local1 Local2 Local3 Remote
Local
ON << control [LC] Enables
Enables
ON < ON I I I I
OFF
OFF O O O O
ON>
ON >>
PLC/DCS [DP]
ON << Enables
ON < ON I I I I
OFF To the control
OFF O O O O function
ON >
ON <<
ON >> En- ON <
abled
control OFF
PC [DPV1] command
ON << Enables ON >
ON < ON I I I I ON >>
OFF
OFF O O O O
ON >
ON >> Activation of enables
for control commands
Operator “ON” and “OFF” in
ON << panel (OP) Enables SIMOCODE ES
ON < ON I I I I
OFF Enables
OFF O O O O ON
ON >
ON >> OFF
Figure 4-3: Enables and enabled control command
SIMOCODE pro
4-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
4.1.4 Settings
Control stations Description

LC Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal (arbi-
ON<< trary sockets ,
but usually device inputs).
ON< The “OFF” plug is 0-active on the control station [LC].
OFF
ON>
ON>>
PLC/DCS [DP] Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal (arbi-
but usually control bits from PROFIBUS DP)
ON<
OFF
ON>
ON>>
PC [DPV1] Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal (arbi-

but usually control bits from PROFIBUS DPV1)
ON<
OFF
ON>
ON>>
Operator panel [OP] Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal (arbi-
<>/<<>> trary sockets ,
but usually operator panel pushbuttons)
ON<
OFF
ON>
ON>>
Mode selector For switching between the 4 modes of operation local 1,

S1 local 2, local 3, remote with arbitrary signals
(arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits
S1 from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Table 4-3: Control station settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-9
Motor Control
4.2 Control functions

4.2.1 Description
Control functions (e.g. direct starters, reversing starters) are used for con-
trolling load feeders.
They have the following important features:
• enabling/evaluation of control stations
• monitoring switching on/switching off (no current flows without the ON com-
mand)
• monitoring the OFF state (no current flows without the ON command)
• monitoring the ON status
• switching off in case of a fault.
For monitoring these statuses, SIMOCODE uses F (feedback) ON, which is
usually derived directly from the current flow information.
All necessary interlocks and connections for the corresponding applications
are already implemented in the control functions.
Control functions contain:
• inputs (plug ) for
– control commands (ON <<,ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>) that are usually
connected with the sockets “Enabled control command”. From there,
control commands come from the different control stations. The num-
ber of active inputs depends on the control function chosen. For
example, with a direct starter, only the inputs “ON>” and “OFF” are
active.
• auxiliary control inputs (plug ), e.g. Feedback ON
• outputs (sockets ) for
– contactor controls QE1 to QE5. The number of contactor controls
depends on the control function chosen. The contactor controls are
usually connected to the relay outputs that are intended for controlling
the contactor coils
– displays (lamp controls) QL*, QLS. The number of displays depends on
the control function chosen.
– statuses, e.g. “Status - ON <<, Status - ON >>”. The number of statu-
ses depends on the control function chosen.
– faults, e.g. “Fault - feedback (F) ON”, “Fault - antivalence”
• settings, e.g. interlocking time, non-maintained command mode ON/OFF, etc.
• motor protection with the parameters e.g. “Overload protection - set current
Ie1”, overload protection - class”, etc. These parameters are described in
chapter3 "Motor Protection".
Like control functions, the motor protection with its parameters and signals is
active “in the background”. Motor protection and thermistor motor protection
are independent functions that switch off the motor when activated via the
control functions.
• Standard function blocks that can be activated as required
• A logic component with all necessary interlockings and connections for the
control function
SIMOCODE pro
4-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Control function schematic

The following schematic shows the general representation of a control
function:
Plugs of the control commands are usually

connected with the “Enabled control com-
mand” sockets
Control commands Contactor controls
ON<< ON<< Contactors/control QE1

En- ON< ON< QE2
Control function
abled
control OFF OFF QE3
command Motor protection
ON> ON> QE4
ON>> ON>> QE5

Displays (lamp
control)
Setting QLE <<
(ON<<)
QLE <
(ON<)
QLA
Aux. control inputs * (OFF)
F ON QLE >
(ON>)
FC QLE >>
(ON>>)
FO QLS (Fault)
TC Status signals 1),
e.g. for PROFIBUS DP
TO ON<<
* Abbreviations ON<
Feed- Feedback ON OFF

back ON ON>
FC Feedback CLOSE ON>>
FO Feedback OPEN
TC Torque CLOSE
TO Torque OPEN
Figure 4-4: General representation of the control function
1) Status signals:
The feeder status feedback is reported via the status signals or the QL
signals. The feedback information (“ON” or “OFF”) is linked to the signal
“Feedback ON” (e.g. current).
Feeder status feedback:
• status signals, e.g. “Status ON”<”, that can be analyzed e.g. via
PROFIBUS DP
• display, (lamp control) “Display - QLE<”, that can activate e.g. a signal lamp
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-11
Motor Control
Extent and application

Depending on the device series, the system provides the following control
functions:
SIMOCODE
Control function pro C pro V

(BU1) (BU2)
Overload relay ✓ ✓
Direct starter ✓ ✓
Reversing starter ✓ ✓
Circuit breaker ✓ ✓
Star-delta starter — ✓
Star-delta starter, — ✓
with reversal of the direction of rotation
Dahlander — ✓
Dahlander, — ✓
Pole-changing switch — ✓
Pole-changing switch, — ✓
Valve — ✓
Slider 1 to slider 5 — ✓
Soft starter — ✓
Soft reversing starter — ✓
Table 4-4: Control functions
SIMOCODE pro
4-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
4.2.2 General settings and definitions
Parameters
Parameter Description
F ON Auxiliary control input “Feedback ON” (connection with arbitrary

socket , usually with “Status - current flowing” socket) as fac-
tory default. An auxiliary contact from the contactor to the signal is
not necessary. Depending on the control function chosen, this
state is signaled by the QLE1 to QLE5 displays and by the “status -
ON <<, - ON <, - ON >, - ON >>” signals. “No current flowing”
means: the motor is switched off. An auxiliary contact from the
contactor is not required for signaling. This state is signaled by the
QLA display and the “Status - OFF” signal
Non-maintained • Deactivated:
command mode the control command on the corresponding input of the control
stations “ON <, ON <<, ON >,ON >>” is saved. It can only be
revoked by an “OFF” control command from the corresponding
control station. The auxiliary contact for locking the contactor is
no longer necessary. Motor feeders are usually operated in lok-
king mode. Locking is preset.
• Activated:
non-maintained command mode affects the inputs of all control
stations “ON<, ON <<, ON >, ON >>”, depending on the control
function chosen. A control command is only effective as long as
there is a “high signal”.
Save switching • Deactivated:

command commands for switching from one direction of rotation/rotational
speed to the other are only implemented after a previous “OFF”
and after the interlocking time/switching interval has elapsed.
This setting is usually used and is preset.
• Activated:
commands for switching from one direction of rotation/rotational
speed to the other are implemented without a previous “OFF”
and after the interlocking time/switching interval has elapsed.
If the selected direction/speed cannot be executed immediately
due to a parameterized interlocking time/switching interval, the
selection is signalized by flickering QLE displays. Your selection
can be canceled at any time with OFF.
Load type You can choose between

• motor
• resistive load
Table 4-5: General settings and definitions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-13
Motor Control
Parameter Description
Feedback time SIMOCODE monitors the status of the feeder (ON or OFF) via F ON
(Feedback ON).
If the status of F ON changes - without a corresponding switching
command - the fault feedback (F) switches off the feeder.
The default value is 0.5 s.
The feedback time can be used to suppress such “feedback faults”
for a defined period of time, e.g. in case of network switches.
When the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE continuously controls
if F ON = 0. If the current flows longer than the set feedback time
without the “ON” control command being issued, a fault message
“fault - feedback (F) ON” is issued. The contactor controls can only
be connected after the fault has been rectified.
When the motor is switched on, SIMOCODE pro continuously con-
trols if F ON = 1. If the current flows longer than the set feedback
time without the “OFF command” being issued, a fault message
“fault - feedback (F) OFF” is issued. The contactor controls are
deactivated.
Execution time SIMOCODE pro monitors switching on/switching off. Switching on/
switching off must be completed within this time period.
The default value is 1.0 s. After an “ON” control command has been
issued, SIMOCODE pro must measure the current in the main cir-
cuit within the execution time. Otherwise, the fault message “Fault
- execution ON command” will be issued. SIMOCODE pro deacti-
vates the contactor controls.
After the “OFF” control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must
not be able to detect any current in the main circuit after the execu-
tion time. Otherwise, the fault message “Fault - execution OFF
command” will be issued. The contactor controls can only be con-
nected after the fault has been rectified.
Switching interval For the "Dahlander" and "pole-changing switch" control functions,
switching from the fast speed to the slow one can be delayed with
the time configured.
For the "Star/Delta" control function, the switching interval extends
the switching interval between switching off the star contactor and
switching on the delta contactor by the time configured.
Interlocking time SIMOCODE pro prevents, e.g. in the case of reversing starters,
both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching
from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the
interlocking time.
Table 4-5: General settings and definitions
SIMOCODE pro
4-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
QE
Switch ON ON Switch OFF
1
OFF OFF
0
Voltage failure,
F ON e.g. pulsating current conditions
OFF
0
Az Rz Az Rz
Az: Execution time

Rz: Feedback time
Figure 4-5: Execution time (Az) and feedback time (Rz) depending on F ON
Faults
The contactor controls are deactivated. There is also:
• a flashing signal on the QLS lamp control
• a flashing signal on the “GEN. FAULT” LED
• the “Status - general fault” signal
• the corresponding signaling bit of the fault
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-15
Motor Control
4.2.3 Overload relay
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro functions like an electronic over-
load relay. Control commands (e.g. ON, OFF) cannot be issued to the load.
The control stations, as well as the inputs of the control function (e.g. ON>,
OFF), do not have any function in the case of overload relays.
When applying the control voltage, SIMOCODE pro automatically closes the
QE3 contactor control; it remains active until it is deactivated by the fault
signal of a protection or monitoring system.
The QE3 contactor control must be connected to an arbitrary relay output
that switches off the contactor coil of the motor contactor in case of over-
load.
Overload relay schematic
Contactors/controlling Contactor controls

QE3
Overload relays
Motor protection
Displays
Aux. control inputs Load type
F ON* QLS
(Fault)
*Feedback ON
Figure 4-6: Overload relay schematic
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter "General set-
tings and definitions" on page 4-13.
Overload relay Description

socket , usually with “Status - current is flowing” socket).
Load type You can select between

• motor
• resistive load.
Table 4-6: Overload relay settings
Note:
In the case of overload, the QE3 output is set (=1) and is only reset when
the overload is tripped (=0).
This output closes when the overload function is parameterized.
SIMOCODE pro
4-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
4.2.4 Direct starters
Description
SIMOCODE pro can switch a motor on and off with this control function.
Control commands
• Start with “ON >” activates the QE1 internal contactor control
• Stop with “OFF” deactivates the QE1 internal contactor control
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of “control stations”). The
inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably
to the “Enabled control command” sockets.
Every fault signal causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated.
Direct starter schematic
Control commands Contactors/controlling Contactor controls

QE1 ON
Direct starters
Motor protection
OFF
Non-maintained
command mode
ON>
Displays (lamps)
Load type
QLA (OFF)
Feedback time QLE >
(ON)
Aux. control inputs Execution time
F ON*
QLS
(Fault)
Status
OFF
ON>
*Feedback ON
Figure 4-7: Direct starter schematic
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-17
Motor Control
Settings
Direct starter Description
OFF OFF control command

(connection with arbitrary socket ,
preferably with the “Enabled control command - OFF” socket)
ON> ON control command

preferably with the “Enabled control command - ON>” socket)

socket , usually with “Status - current is flowing” socket).
Non-maintained • Deactivated (presetting)

command mode • Activated

• motor
• resistive load
Feedback time Range: 0 to 25.5 seconds
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds

Table 4-7: Direct starter settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
4.2.5 Reversing starters
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can control the direction of rota-
tion of the motor (forwards and backwards).
Control commands
• Start with “ON >” activates the QE1 contactor control (clockwise i.e. for-
wards)
• Start with “ON <” activates the QE2 contactor control (counter-clockwise i.e.
backwards)
• Stop with “OFF” deactivates the QE1 and QE2 internal contactor controls.
to the “enabled control command” sockets.
Every fault signal causes the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls to be deacti-
vated.
Switching the direction of rotation

Switching the direction of rotation is possible
• via the OFF control command
• directly, when the “Save switching command” is activated
• if the signal “Status - ON >” or “Status - ON <” is no longer issued (motor is
switched OFF) AND after the interlocking time has expired.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both the contactors from switching on at the
same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be
delayed via the interlocking time.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-19
Motor Control
Reversing starter schematic
Control commands Contactors/controlling Contactor activations

QE1 Right
Reversing starter
ON< QE2
Motor protection Left
OFF Non-maintained
command mode
ON> Save switching
command Displays
QLE < (ON<)
Load type
QLA (OFF)
Feedback time QLE >
(ON>)
F ON* Interlocking time
QLS
(Fault)
Status -
ON<
OFF
ON>
*Feedback ON Interlocking time

active
Figure 4-8: Reversing starter schematic
SIMOCODE pro
4-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Settings
Reversing starter Description
ON< ON< control command, counter-clockwise rotation

usually with “Enabled control command - ON<” socket)

(connection with optional socket ,
usually with “Enabled control command - OFF” socket)
ON> ON> control command, clockwise rotation

usually with “Enabled control command - ON>” socket)

socket , usually with “Status - current is flowing” socket)

Save switching • Deactivated (presetting)

command • Activated

• motor
• resistive load
Interlocking time Range 0 to 255 seconds

Table 4-8: Reversing starter settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-21
Motor Control
4.2.6 Circuit breaker
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can ideally switch a circuit brea-
ker (e.g. 3WL, 3VL) ON and OFF. Thus, the circuit breakers are connected to
PROFIBUS DP via SIMOCODE pro.
Control commands
• Start with “ON>” activates the QE1 contactor control for an impulse of
400 ms.
• Stop with “OFF” activates the QE2 contactor control for an impulse of
400 ms.
• With “reset”, the QE2 contactor control is activated for an impulse of 400 ms
when the circuit breaker is released (alarm switch = ON).
The impulse of a control command is always fully executed before the
“counter impulse” is set.
Making internal assignments

You have to make the following assignments:
1. Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the
“ON connection” of the motor drive of the circuit breaker.
2. Assign the QE2 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the
“OFF connection” of the motor drive of the circuit breaker.
3. Assign the SIMOCODE pro input, which is connected to the auxiliary switch
(HS) of the circuit breaker, to the auxiliary control input “Feedback ON”.
4. Assign the SIMOCODE pro input, which is connected to the alarm switch of
the circuit breaker, to the input of the “External fault 1” standard function
block.
SIMOCODE pro
4-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Circuit breaker schematic

QE1 400 ms. ON
Circuit breaker
QE2 400 ms. OFF
Motor protection
OFF Non-maintained
command mode
ON>
Displays
Load type
QLA (OFF)
Feedback time QLE >
(ON)
F ON*
Auxiliary switch QLS
(Fault)
Status
OFF
ON>
*Feedback ON
Figure 4-9: Circuit breaker schematic
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-23
Motor Control
Settings
Circuit breaker Description


F ON Auxiliary control input “Feedback ON” (connection always with sok-

ket , (input), which the auxiliary switch of the circuit breaker is
connected to.)


• motor
• resistive load
Feedback time Higher than the motor running time of the motor drive of the circuit
breaker. Range: 0 to 25.5 seconds

Table 4-9: Circuit breaker settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
4.2.7 Star-delta starters
Description
Star-delta starting is used to limit the starting current and to avoid overloa-
ding the network. In this control function, SIMOCODE pro starts the motor
first with a star-switched stator winding and then switches it to delta.
Control commands
• Start with “ON” first activates the QE1 contactor control (star contactor) and
then immediately activates the QE3 contactor control (network contactor)
• Stop with “OFF” deactivates the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls.
to the “Enabled control command” sockets
Every fault signal causes the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be
deactivated.
Switching from star to delta

For this, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates the QE1 contactor control before
the QE2 contactor control (delta contactor) is connected.
SIMOCODE pro switches from star to delta:
• current-dependent with decreasing current below the level (I < 90% Ie).
• time-dependent according to the set time parameter “Maximum time for star
operation” when the current in the star operation does not sink below this
level.
Notes
It is recommended wiring the QE* contactor controls to the relay outputs of
the basic unit.
Attention
If you use the internal earth-fault detection with a star-delta connection,
false trippings might occur. For delta operation, the summation current is
non-zero due to harmonics.
Attention
If the current measurement module is switched to delta (normal case), a
current which is 1/√3 times smaller must be set for the star-delta starter
control function.
Example: In = 100 A Ie = In x 1/√3
Ie = 100 A x 1/√3 = 57.7 A
Current to be set Ie = 57.7 A
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-25
Motor Control
Switching interval
The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the switching
interval.
Reason: for motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated cur-
rent, the mains voltage plus motor EMF might lead to a very high delta star-
ting current if the switching interval is too short. The motor EMF decreases
if the interval is longer.
Star-delta starter schematic

QE1
Star contactor
Star-delta starter
QE2
Delta contactor
Motor protection
OFF
Non-maintained QE3
Network contactor
ON> command mode
Displays
Load type
QLA (OFF)
Feedback time QLE >
(ON)
F ON*
QLS
Switching interval (Fault)
Maximum time for Status -

star operation
Transformer
mounted OFF
ON>
*Feedback ON Switching time

active
Figure 4-10: Star-delta starter schematic
SIMOCODE pro
4-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Settings
Star-delta starter Description



socket, usually with “Status - current is flowing” socket)


• motor
• resistive load
Switching interval Range 0 to 655.3 seconds(10 ms steps)
Maximum time for Time-dependent switching from star to delta

star operation range 0 to 255 seconds
Transformer moun- The set current and the switching levels for star-delta switching
ted depend on the mounting place of the current measurement
module.
• Delta: set current reduced to In x 1/√3
• In supply cable: set current Ie = In (rated current of the motor)
Table 4-10: Star-delta starter settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-27
Motor Control
4.2.8 Star-delta starters with reversal of the direction of rotation
Description
With this control function, a motor can be started in both directions of rota-
tion in star-delta operation.
Control commands
• Clockwise rotation: start with “ON>” first activates the QE1 (star contactor)
contactor control and then immediately activates the QE3 contactor control
(network contactor, clockwise rotation)
• Counter-clockwise rotation: start with “ON<” first activates the QE1 (star con-
tactor) contactor activation and then immediately activates the QE4 contactor
control QE4 (network contactor, counter-clockwise rotation)
• Stop with “OFF” deactivates the QE1, QE2, QE3 and QE4 contactor con-
trols.
Every fault signal causes the QE1, QE2 QE3 and QE4 contactor controls to
be deactivated.
Switching from star to delta

For this, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates the QE1 contactor control before
connecting the QE2 contactor control (delta contactor).
SIMOCODE pro switches from star to delta:
• current-dependent, for decreasing current below the level (I < 90% Ie).
• time-dependent to the set time parameter “Maximum time for star opera-
tion” when the current in the star operation does not sink below this level.

Itis possible to change the direction of rotation
• if the signal “Feedback ON” is no longer issued (motor is switched off) AND
after the interlocking time has expired.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both the contactors from switching on at the
same time.
Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the
“interlocking time“.
Start-up is always in star mode.
SIMOCODE pro
4-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Notes
It is recommended to wire the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls to the relay
outputs of the basic unit. You need at least 1 digital module for this control
function.
Attention
If you use the internal earth-fault detection for a star-delta connection,
false trippings might occur.
For delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.
Attention
If the current measurement module is switched to delta (normal case), a
current which is 1/√3 times smaller must be set for the star-delta starter
control function.
Example: In = 100 A Ie = In x 1/√3
Ie = 100 A x 1/√3 = 57.7 A
Current to be set Ie = 57.7 A
Switching interval
The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the switching
interval.
Reason: for motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated cur-
rent, the mains voltage plus motor EMF might lead to a very high delta star-
ting current, if the switching interval is too short. The motor EMF decreases
if the interval is longer.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-29
Motor Control
Star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation

QE1
Star-delta starter with Star contactor
ON< reversal of the
direction of rotation QE2 Delta contactor
OFF Motor protection
QE3 Right - network contactor
Non-maintained
ON> command mode
QE4
Save switching Left - network contactor
command Displays
Load type QLE<
(ON<)
QLA (OFF)
Feedback time
Aux. control inputs Execution time QLE>
(ON>)
F ON* Interlocking time QLS
(Fault)
Switching interval
Maximum time for Status -
star operation ON<
Transformer OFF
mounted
ON>
Switching interval
*Feedback ON
active
Interlocking time
active
Figure 4-11: Star-delta starter schematic, with reversal of the direction of rotation
SIMOCODE pro
4-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Settings
Star-delta starter Description

ON> ON> control command

ON< ON< control command





• motor
• resistive load
Switching interval Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds
Maximum time for Time-dependent switching from star to delta.

star operation Range 0 to 255 seconds
Transformer moun- The set current and the switching levels for the star-delta switching
ted depend on the mounting position of the current transformer/ cur-
rent measurement module.
• Delta: set current reduced to In x 1/√3
• In supply cable: set current Ie = In (rated current of the motor)
Table 4-11: Star-delta starter settings, with reversal of the direction of rotation
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-31
Motor Control
4.2.9 Dahlander
Description
With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with only one stator
winding at two speeds (fast and slow). SIMOCODE pro wires the stator
winding via the contactors so that there is a high pole number at low speed
and a low pole number at high speed.
Control commands
• Slow: start with “ON>” first activates the QE2 contactor control (slow)
• Fast: start with “ON>>” first activates the QE3 contactor control (star contac-
tor, fast) and then immediately activates the QE1 contactor control (network
contactor, fast)
• Stop with “OFF” deactivates the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls.
Every fault signal causes the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be
deactivated.
Switching the speed

It is possible to switch the speed
• when the signal “Feedback ON” is no longer issued (motor was switched off)
AND when changing from “fast” = > “slow” after the switching interval has
expired.
SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for the “fast” speed from being
switched on at the same time as the contactor for the “slow” speed.
Switching interval
The “switching interval” parameter can be used to delay switching from
“fast” to “slow” to give the motor enough time to run down.
SIMOCODE pro
4-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Note
Attention
Two set currents must be set for the Dahlander circuit:
• Ie1 for the slower speed
• Ie1 for the faster speed
Depending on the current range, the current can be directly measured at
both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise, you will need -
according to the corresponding speed - two external current converters (e.g.
3UF18 with 1A secondary transformer rated current), whose secondary
cables must lead through the current measurement module with the range
0.3 - 3A. The Ie1/Ie2 set currents must be converted according to the secon-
dary currents of the external transformers.
Dahlander schematic

QE1
Fast
Dahlander
QE2
Motor protection Slow
OFF
Non-maintained QE3
command mode Fast - star contactor
ON>
Save switching
ON>> command
Displays
Load type
QLA (OFF)
Feedback time
Aux. control inputs Execution time QLE>
(ON>)
F ON* QLE>
(ON>>)
Switching interval QLS
(Fault)
Status -
OFF
ON>
ON>>
*Feedback ON
Switching interval
active
Figure 4-12: Dahlander control function schematic
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-33
Motor Control
Settings
Dahlander Description

ON> ON> control command (slow)

ON>> ON>> control command (fast)

usually with “Enabled control command - ON>>” socket)




• motor
• resistive load
Execution time Range: 0 to 6553.5 seconds
Switching interval Range: 0 to 6553.5 seconds

Table 4-12: Dahlander settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-34 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
4.2.10 Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation
Description
This control function is used to change the direction of rotation of a motor at
both speeds.
Control commands
• Right - slow: start with “ON>” first activates QE2 the contactor control (right-
slow).
• Right - fast: start with “ON>>” first activates the QE3 contactor control (fast-
star contactor) and then immediately activates the QE1 contactor control
(right-fast)
• Left - slow: start with “ON<” activates the QE4 contactor control (left-slow)
• Left - fast: start with “ON<<” activates the QE3 contactor control (fast-star
contactor) and then immediately activates the QE5 contactor control (left-
fast)
• Stop with “OFF” deactivates the contactor controls.
It does not matter in what order the control commands are given.
Every fault signal causes the contactor controls to be deactivated.

Itis possible to switch the direction of rotation
• directly, when the parameter “Save switching command” is activated
• if the signal “Feedback ON” is no longer issued (motor was switched off)
AND after the interlocking time has expired.
SIMOCODE prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time.
Switching the speed

It is possible to switch the speed
• directly when the “Save switching command” is activated
AND when changing from “fast” = > “slow” after the switching interval has
expired.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-35
Motor Control
Switching interval
The “switching interval” parameter is used to delay switching from “fast”
to “slow” to give the motor enough time to run down.
Notes
You need at least 1 digital module for this control function. This control
function cannot be implemented with bistable relay outputs.
Schematic Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation

ON<< QE1
Dahlander with Right - fast
reversal of the
ON< direction of rotation QE2
Right - slow
QE3
Non-maintained Fast - star contactor
ON> command mode
QE4 Left - slow
ON>> Save switching
command
QE5 Left - fast
Load type
Displays
Feedback time QLE<<
(ON<<)
QLE<
F ON* (ON<)
Interlocking time
QLA (OFF)
Switching interval
QLE>
(ON>)
QLE>
(ON>>)
QLS
(Fault)
Status -
ON<<
ON<
OFF
ON>
*Feedback ON ON>>
Switching interval
active
Interlocking time
active
Figure 4-13: Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation
SIMOCODE pro
4-36 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Settings
Dahlander with Description

reversal of the
direction of
rotation
ON<< ON<< control command (left, fast)

usually with “Enabled control command - ON<<” socket)
ON< ON< control command (left, slow)


(connection with optional socket ,
optionally with socket “Enabled control command - OFF”)
ON> ON> control command (left, slow)

ON>> ON>> control command (right, fast)





• motor
• resistive load
Execution time Range: 0 to 6553.5 seconds
Interlocking time Range: 0 to 255 seconds
Switching interval Range: 0 to 6553.5 seconds

Table 4-13: Dahlander control function settings with reversal of the direction of rotation
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-37
Motor Control
4.2.11 Pole-changing switches
Description
With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with two stator win-
dings in two speed levels (fast and slow).
Control commands
• Slow: start with “ON>” activates the QE2 contactor control (slow).
• Fast: start with “ON>>” activates the QE1 contactor control (fast).
Switching the speed

It is possible to switch the speed when the "Feedback ON" signal is no lon-
ger issued (motor is switched off) AND when changing from "fast" -> "slow"
after the switching interval has expired:
• directly, when the “Save switching command” is activated.
Switching interval
The “switching interval” parameter can be used to delay switching from
“fast” to “slow” to give the motor enough time to run down.
SIMOCODE pro
4-38 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Note
Attention
Two set currents have to be set for the pole-changing switch:
both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise, you will need -
0.3 - 3A. The Ie1/Ie2 set currents must be converted according to the secon-
dary currents of the external transformers.
Pole-changing switches schematic

QE1
Fast
Pole-changing switches
QE2
Slow
Non-maintained
ON> command code
ON>> Save switching
command Displays
Load type
QLA (OFF)
Feedback time
Aux. control inputs QLE>
Execution time (ON>)
F ON* QLE>>
(ON>>)
Switching interval QLS
(Fault)
Status
OFF
ON>
ON>>
*Feedback ON
Switching interval
active
Figure 4-14: Pole-changing switch control function
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-39
Motor Control
Settings
Pole-changing Description
switches

ON> ON> control command (slow)

ON>> ON>> control command (fast)





• motor
• resistive load
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 seconds

Table 4-14: Pole-changing switch settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-40 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
4.2.12 Pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation
Description
This control function is used to change the direction of rotation of a motor at
both speeds.
Control commands
• Right - slow: start with “ON>” activates the QE2 contactor control (right-slow)
• Right - fast: start with “ON>>” activates the QE1 contactor activation (right-
fast)
• Left - slow: start with “ON<” activates the QE4 contactor control (left-slow)
• Left - fast: start with “ON<<” activates the QE5 contactor control (left-fast)
• Stop with “OFF” deactivates the contactor controls
to SIMOCODE pro. The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the correspon-
ding sockets, preferably to the “Enabled control command” sockets.

Itis possible to switch the direction of rotation
• directly, when the parameter “Save switching command” is activated
• if the signal “Feedback ON” is no longer issued (motor was switched OFF)
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same
time.
Switching the speed

It is possible to switch
• directly when the “Save switching command” is activated
AND when changing from “fast” to “slow” after the switching interval has
expired.
Switching interval
SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for the speeds “fast” and “slow”
from switching on at the same time. The “switching interval” parameter is
used to delay switching from “fast” to “slow” to give the motor enough
time to run down.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-41
Motor Control
Notes
At least one additional digital module is necessary for this control function.
Attention
Two set currents are to be set with the pole-changing switch:
both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise you will need -
0.3 - 3A. The Ie1/ Ie2 set currents must be converted according to the
secondary currents of the external transformers
Schamatic: Pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation

ON<< Pole-changing switch with QE1 Right - fast
reversal of the
ON< direction of rotation QE2
Right - slow
Non-maintained
ON> command mode
QE4 Left - slow
ON>> Save switching
command
QE5 Left - fast
Load type
Displays
Feedback time QLE<<
(ON<<)
Execution time
QLE<
F ON* (ON<)
Interlocking time
QLA (OFF)
Switching interval
QLE>
(ON>)
QLE>>
(ON>>)
QLS
(Fault)
Status
ON<<
ON<
OFF
ON>
ON>>
*Feedback ON
Switching interval
active
Interlocking time
active
Figure 4-15: Pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation
SIMOCODE pro
4-42 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Settings

reversal of the
direction of
rotation
ON<< ON<< control command (left, fast)

usually with “Enabled control command - ON<<” socket)
ON< ON< control command (left, slow)


ON> ON> control command (right, slow)

ON>> ON>> control command (right, fast)

Feedback ON Auxiliary control input “Feedback ON” (connection with arbitrary




• motor
• resistive load

Table 4-15: Settings for pole-changing switches with reversal of the direction of rotation
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-43
Motor Control
4.2.13 Valve
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate a solenoid valve.
With the control commands “OPEN” and “CLOSE”, the valve is brought into
the corresponding end position. SIMOCODE must be informed via corre-
sponding limit switches (OPEN, CLOSE) when the end position has been
reached.
Control commands
• Open: start with “ON>” activates the QE1 internal contactor control.
• Close: stop with “OFF” deactivates the QE1 internal contactor control.
Every fault signal causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated and
puts the valve into the “close” position.
Notes
Attention
The motor protection functions are not active. A current measurement
module is not necessary.
Attention
If both end position switches respond at the same time (FO=1 and FC=1),
the valve is immediately switched OFF via the fault message “Fault - double
1” (=“close”)
If the end position feedback does not correspond to the control command,
the valve is switched off with the fault message “Fault - end position fault”
(=“close”)
SIMOCODE pro
4-44 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Valve schematic

QE1 OPEN
Valve
OFF
Non-maintained
ON> command mode
Displays
QLA (CLOSE)
QLE>
(OPEN)
Aux. control inputs * Execution time
QLS
(Fault)
FC
Status
FO
* Abbreviations
OFF
FC Feedback CLOSE
ON>
FO Feedback OPEN
FC
FO
Figure 4-16: Control function valve schematic
Settings
Direct starters Description
OFF OFF control command (close)

ON> ON control command (open)


Execution time Time until the end position is reached.

Range: 0 to 6553.5 seconds
Table 4-16: Valve control function settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-45
Motor Control
4.2.14 Slider
Description
SIMOCODE can control sliders/actuators with this control function. The
slider is moved into the corresponding end position with the “OPEN” and
“CLOSE” control commands and is deactivated via its end position switches
(1-active) or torque switch (0-active).
SIMOCODE pro must be informed about the response of the end position
switches/ torque switches via its inputs.
Control commands
• Open: start with “ON >” activates the QE1 contactor control until “End posi-
tion OPEN” (feedback open) is reached.
• Close: start with “ON <” activates the QE2 contactor control until “End posi-
tion CLOSE” (feedback close) is reached.
The drive remains stopped in that position.
to SIMOCODE (see also the description of “control stations”). The inputs
(plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the
“Enabled control command” sockets.
Function schematic
Torque switch
Torque switch OPEN TC
Motor shaft with springs

at the beginning
and end FC
OPEN CLOSE FO End position switch
Slider
Gear
OPEN CLOSE
Figure 4-17: Function schematic of the torque switch and the end position switch when controlling
sliders
SIMOCODE pro
4-46 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Switching the direction of travel

It is possible to switch the direction of travel
• if the signal “Feedback ON” is no longer issued (motor was switched off)
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors switching on at the same time.
Notes
Attention
The corresponding torque switch must not respond before the associated
end position switch when the torque switch (TO)/(TC) is connected.
In this case, the slider is switched off immediately with the fault message
“Fault - blocked slider”.
If both end position switches respond at the same time (FO=1 and FC=1),
the slider is immediately switched off via the fault message “Fault - double
1” (=“close”)
If both torque switches respond at the same time (TO=0 and TC=0), the
slider is switched off immediately with the fault message “Fault - double 0”.
If the end position feedback does not correspond to the control command,
the slider is switched off with the fault message “Fault - end position fault”.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-47
Motor Control
Slider schematic
Control commands Protecting/controlling Contactor controls

QE1 OPEN
ON< Slider
QE2
Motor protection CLOSE
OFF
Non-maintained
ON> command mode
Displays
QLE< CLOSE
Load type
QLA Stop
Feedback time QLE>
OPEN
Aux. control inputs * Execution time
Feedback ON Interlocking time
* Abbreviations QLS
FC (Fault)
Feed- Feedback ON FO Status -
back ON ON<
TC CLOSE
FC Feedback CLOSE
OFF Stop
FO Feedback OPEN TO
ON>
TC Torque CLOSE OPEN
TO Torque OPEN Closes
Opens
FC
FO
TC
TO
Interlocking time
active
Figure 4-18: Slider schematic
SIMOCODE pro
4-48 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Variants for slide control

The following table shows the 5 variants for slide control:
Variant
CLOSE OPEN
Switch off
TC FC FO TO
Torque End position End position Torque OPEN
CLOSE CLOSE OPEN
Slider 1 — X X —
After reaching the end position FO
(OPEN) or FC (CLOSE).
Slider 2 X X X X
(OPEN) or FC (CLOSE) AND
response of the associated torque
switch TO (OPEN) or TC (CLOSE)
Slider 3 X X X —
(open). After reaching the end posi-
tion 'CLOSE', the respective torque
switch TC must respond after the
end position switch FC has respon-
ded.
Slider 4 — X X X
After reaching the end position FC
(CLOSE). After reaching the end
position FO (OPEN), the respective
torque switch TO must also
respond after the end position
switch FO has responded.
Slider 5 Antivalent active Antivalent active
After reaching the end position or the
torque. The actuator is either monito-
red by the end position switches or
by the torque switches. The swit-
ches are implemented as changeo-
ver contacts and are checked for
antivalence. In the case of non-anti-
valent feedback (e.g. FC=0 and
TC=0), SIMOCODE recognizes a
wire break and deactivates the slider
with the fault message “Fault - anti-
valence”
Table 4-17: Variants for slide control
Notes
Attention
The signals of the torque switches and the position switches must be wired
to the inputs of the basic units. Torque switches must be O-active, whereas
the position switches must be 1-active.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-49
Motor Control
Settings

reversal of the
direction of
rotation
ON< ON< control command (close)

OFF Control command stop

ON> ON> control command (open)


FC Auxiliary control input “Feedback CLOSE” (connection with arbi-

trary socket , usually with the socket of an input which the end
position switch is wired to)
FO Auxiliary control input “Feedback OPEN” (connection with arbitrary

socket , usually with the socket of an input which the limit
switch is wired to)
TC Auxiliary control input “Torque CLOSE” (connection with arbitrary

socket , usually with the socket of an input which the torque
switch is wired to)
TO Auxiliary control input “Torque CLOSE” (connection with arbitrary

socket , usually with the socket of an input which the torque
switch is wired to)


• motor
• resistive load
Execution time Time until the limit position is reached.

range: 0 to 6553.5 seconds
Interlocking time Range: 0 to 255 seconds

Table 4-18: Control function slider settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-50 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
4.2.15 Soft starters
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft star-
ter. Thus, the 3RW soft starters are connected to the PROFIBUS DP via
SIMOCODE pro.
Control commands
• Start with “ON >” activates the QE1 and QE4 internal contactor controls.
• Stop with “OFF” first deactivates the QE4 contactor control. When the signal
“Feedback ON” is no longer issued, the QE1 contactor control is deactivated
3 s later in order to facilitate a smooth run down via the soft starter.
• With “reset”, the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and then sends
the soft starter an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay out-
put.

1. Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that activates the coil of
the network contactor
2. Assign the QE4 contactor control to an arbitrary relay output with which the
“ON input” from the soft starter is to be activated
3. Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output which gives the acknow-
ledgement signal of 20 ms to the soft starter
4. Assign the “ON>” and “OFF” control commands to the enabled control com-
mands
5. Assign the input of SIMOCODE pro that is connected to the signaling output
“fault” of the soft starter to the input of the standard function module “exter-
nal fault 1”.
6. The signal “End of start-up” of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the
outputs and processed by SIMOCODE.
Note
Attention
In order to avoid disconnections due to faults, the “Execution time” parame-
ter in SIMOCODE pro must be set at least to the smooth running down time
of the soft starter.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-51
Motor Control
Soft starter schematic

QE1
Network contactor
Soft starter
Motor protection
OFF
Non-maintained QE3 20 ms.
ON> command mode
QE4
ON
Load type Displays

QLA (OFF)
Feedback time QLE>
(ON>)
F ON*
QLS
(Fault)
Status
OFF
ON>
*Feedback ON
Figure 4-19: Soft starter schematic
Settings
Circuit breakers Description

Feedback ON Auxiliary control input “Feedback ON”
(connection with arbitrary socket , usually with “Status - current
is flowing” socket)
• motor
• resistive load
Execution time At least > smooth running down time.
range 0 to 6553.5 seconds
Table 4-19: Soft starter settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-52 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
4.2.16 Soft reversing starter
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft star-
ter. Thus, the 3RW soft starters are connected to the PROFIBUS DP via
SIMOCODE pro. With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can control the
motor direction of rotation (forwards and backwards).
Control commands
• Start with “ON >” activates QE1 and QE4 contactor control (clockwise, i.e.
forwards)
• Start with “ON <” activates QE2 and QE4 contactor control (counter-clock-
wise i.e. backwards)
• Stop with “OFF” first deactivates the QE4 contactor control. When the
“Feedback ON” signal is no longer issued, the QE1 / QE4 contactor control is
deactivated 3 s later in order to facilitate a smooth run down via the soft star-
ter.
• With “reset”, the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and sends the
soft starter an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of “control stations”). Thus, the
Every fault signal causes the contactor activations to be deactivated.

Itis possible to switching the direction of rotation
• directly, when the “Save switching command” parameter is activated
• if the “Status - ON>” or “Status - ON<” signal is no longer issued (motor was
switched OFF) AND after the interlocking time has expired.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same
time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed
via the interlocking time.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-53
Motor Control

the network contactor (right)
the network contactor (left)
3. Assign the QE4 contactor control to an optional relay output with which the
“ON” input from the soft starter must be activated
4. Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output which gives the acknow-
ledgement signal of 20 ms to the soft starter
5. Assign the “ON>”, “ON<” and “OFF” control commands to the enabled con-
trol commands
6. Assign the input of SIMOCODE pro which is connected to the signaling out-
put “Fault” of the soft starter to the input of the standard function module
“External fault 1”.
7. The “Start-up end” signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the
outputs and processed by SIMOCODE pro.
Note
An additional digital module may be necessary for this control function.
Soft reversing starter schematic

QE1 Right
Soft reversing starter
ON< QE2
Motor protection Left
OFF Non-maintained QE3 20 ms.
command mode
ON>
Save switching QE4
command ON
Displays
Load type
QLE< (ON<)
Feedback time QLA (OFF)
Feedbacks Execution time QLE>
(ON>)
F ON* Interlocking time
QLS (Fault)
Status -
ON<
OFF
ON>
*Feedback ON Interlocking time

active
Figure 4-20: Soft reversing starter schematic
SIMOCODE pro
4-54 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Motor Control
Settings
Reversing starter Description
ON< ON< control command, counter-clockwise rotation


ON> ON> control command, clockwise rotation

Feedback ON Auxiliary control input “Feedback ON” (connection with arbitrary




• motor
• resistive load
Execution time At least > smooth running down time.

Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds

Table 4-20: Soft reversing starter settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 4-55
4.3
4-56
Lamp control
QLE<< QLE< QLA QLE> QLE>>
Specification/ Control station Contactor control
(ON<<) (ON<) (OFF) (ON>) (ON>>)
Control function
Status signal
Motor Control
ON<< ON< OFF ON> ON>> QE1 QE2 QE3 QE4 QE5 ON<< ON< OFF ON> ON>>
Overload 1),2) - - - - - - - Active - - - - - - -
Direct starter 1),2) - - OFF ON - ON - - - - - OFF ON -
Reversing starter 1),2) - Left OFF Right - Right Left - - - Left OFF Right -
Circuit breaker 1),2) - - OFF ON - ON OFF - - - - - OFF ON -
impulse impulse
Star-delta - - OFF ON - Star Delta Network - - - - OFF ON -
starter 2) contactor contactor contactor
Star-delta starter Left OFF Right - Star Delta Right Left - Left OFF Right -
with reversal of the direction contactor contactor network network
of rotation 2) contactor contactor
Dahlander 2) - - OFF Slow Fast Fast Slow Fast - - - - OFF Slow Fast
of the control functions

star
contactor
Dahlander Left Left OFF Right Right Right Right Fast Left Left Left Left OFF Right Right
with reversal of the direction fast slow slow fast fast slow star slow fast fast slow slow fast
of rotation 2) contactor
Pole changing switch 2) - - OFF Slow Fast Fast Slow - - - - - OFF Slow Fast
Pole changing switch Left Left OFF Right Right Right Right - Left Left Left Left OFF Right Right
with reversing the direction fast slow slow fast fast slow slow fast fast slow slow fast
of rotation 2)
Valve 2) - - Closed Open - Open - - - - - - Closed Open -
Slider 1 2) - Closed Stop Open - Open Closed - - - - Closed Stop Open -
status signal of the control functions

Soft starter 2) - - OFF ON - ON - Reset ON - - - OFF ON -
Table 4-21: Active control stations, contactor & lamp controls and status signal
network command
contactor
Soft reversing starter2) - Left OFF Right - Right Left Reset ON - - Left OFF Right -
network- network- command
contactor contactor
1) Basic unit 1, SIMOCODE pro C

Active control stations, contactor & lamp controls and
2) Basic unit 2, SIMOCODE pro V
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

SIMOCODE pro
Monitoring Functions 5
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the monitoring functions
• earth fault monitoring
• current limit monitoring
• operation monitoring.
Like motor protection and motor control, the monitoring functions work “in
the background”. All parameters of the monitoring functions are explained.
They can be active or not active, depending on the control function selected.
Target groups
• configurators
• programmers
• commissioners
• service personnel.
Necessary knowledge
• SIMOCODE pro
• motor protection, motor control
• knowledge of electrical drive engineering.
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under
Device parameters > Monitoring functions.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 5-1
Monitoring Functions
5.1 Earth-fault monitoring via current/voltage

measurement module
5.1.1 Description
SIMOCODE pro measures and monitors all three phase currents. By evalua-
ting the summation current of the 3 current values, the motor feeder can be
monitored for a possible fault current/earth fault. The internal earth fault
monitoring is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in net-
works which are either grounded directly or grounded with a low impe-
dance. On recognizing an earth fault, a definable and delayable response can
be parameterized.
5.1.2 Internal earth fault
Response
Here you can set the response of SIMOCODE pro to an internal earth fault:
For this, see also “Tables for the response of SIMOCODE pro” in Kapitel
"Important Notes".
QE1
Current QE2
from Monitoring - Internal earth fault Switching
QE3
current off QE4
measure- QE5
ment
Response to an internal earth fault
See Signal
table 5-1
Delay of the internal earth fault - Internal earth fault
Figure 5-1: Internal earth fault monitoring
Response Internal
earth fault
Deactivated X (d)
Signal X
Warn X
Switch off X
Delay 0 ... 25.5 s
Table 5-1: Internal earth-fault monitoring” response
SIMOCODE pro
5-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
5.2 Current limit monitoring

5.2.1 Description
The current limit monitoring function is used - independently of the overload

protection - for process monitoring. Exceeding a current limit which is still
below the overload limit can e.g. indicate a dirty filter on a pump or a motor
mounting which is running increasingly sluggishly. Falling below a current
limit can be the first hint that a drive motor belt is worn-out. SIMOCODE pro
supports two-phase monitoring of the motor current for upper and lower
current limits which can be freely chosen. Here, the response of
SIMOCODE pro on reaching a pre-warning or trip level can be freely parame-
terized and delayed.
Current limit values
Trip level: I>
Response when I> See Signal

table 5-2 - Trip level I>
Delay when I>
Current
from Warning level: I>
current
measure- Response when I> See Signal
table 5-3 - Warning level I>
ment
Delay when I>
Trip level: I<
Response when I< See Signal

table 5-4
- Trip level I<
Delay when I<
Warning level: I<
Response when I< See Signal

table 5-5 - Warning level I<
Delay when I<
Hysteresis levels H
Figure 5-2: Current limit monitoring
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 5-3
Diagram
The following diagram shows the warning level and trip level functions for
the upper and lower current limits:
Current
Trip
level I>
Upper
H current
Warning level I> limit
H
Warning level I<
Lower
current
H limit
Trip
level I<
0
H Hysteresis
Figure 5-3: Warning levels and trip levels for the upper and lower current limits
SIMOCODE pro
5-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
5.2.2 I> (upper limit)
Trip level, warning level

With current limit monitoring I> (upper limit), 2 different synchronization
levels, I> (upper limit) trip level and I> (upper limit) warning level, can be
parameterized and monitored.
If the current of one or more phases exceeds the synchronization level, the
current limit monitoring is activated.
Range:
Trip level: 0 up to 1020% of Ie
Warning level: 0 up to 1020% of Ie
Trip level response

Here you can set the response of SIMOCODE pro if the trip level is excee-
ded:
For this, see also “Tables for the response of SIMOCODE pro” in Kapitel
"Important Notes".
Response Trip level

Deactivated X (d)
Signal X
Warn -
Switch off X
Delay 0 ... 25.5 s
Table 5-2: “Trip level” response for current limit monitoring I>
Warning level response

Here you can set the response of SIMOCODE pro if the warning level is
exceeded:
For this, see also “Tables for the Responses of SIMOCODE pro” in Kapitel
"Important Notes".
Response Warning
level:
Deactivated X (d)
Signal X
Warn X
Switch off -
Delay 0 ... 25.5 s
Table 5-3: “Warning level” response for current limit monitoring I>
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 5-5
5.2.3 I< (lower limit)
Trip level, warning level

With current limit monitoring I< (lower limit), 2 different synchronization
levels (trip level / warning level) can be parameterized and monitored. If the
current of one or more phases falls below the synchronization level, the cur-
rent limit monitoring is activated.
Range:
Trip level: 0 up to 1020% of Ie
Warning level: 0 up to 1020% of Ie
Trip level response

Here you can set the response of SIMOCODE pro on falling below the trip
level:
"Important Notes".
Response Trip level

Deactivated X (d)
Signal X
Warn -
Switch off X
Delay 0 ... 25.5 s
Table 5-4: “Trip level” response for current limit monitoring I<
Warning level response

Here you can set the response of SIMOCODE pro on falling below the
warning level:
"Important Notes".
Response Warning
level:
Deactivated X
Signal X
Warn X
Switch off -
Delay 0 ... 25.5 s
Table 5-5: “Trip level” response for current limit monitoring I<
SIMOCODE pro
5-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
5.3 Operation monitoring

5.3.1 Description
SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times of a motor
in order to avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors because they were
either running too long (wear-out) or they were stopped too long a period of
time. For example, if an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal can be
issued which can indicate that maintenance on the relevant motor is neces-
sary or even that the motor should be replaced. After replacing the motor,
the operating hours and stop times can be reset.
In order to avoid excessive thermal strain on a motor and its premature
aging, the number of motor start-ups in a selected time frame can be
limited. The number of starts still possible is available for further processing
in SIMOCODE pro. The limited number of possible starts can be indicated
by pre -warnings.
QE1
Switching
QE2
off
Operation monitoring QE3
QE4
Operating hours QE5
Operating hours level. See Motor operating hours

table 5-6
Response Signal
- Motor operating hours >
Stop time
Stopped time level Motor stop times
Control See
functions table 5-6
Response Signal - Stop time >
Number of starts
Permissible starts
Number of motor starts
Start time frame
See Signal
Overshoot response table 5-6 - Number of motor starts>
See - Another start permitted
Pre-warning response
table 5-6
Interlocking time - No start permitted
Figure 5-4: Operation monitoring
Response
Response Monitoring Stop time Overshooting Number of

operating monitoring - starts pre-
hours - level level warning
Deactivated X (d) X (d) X (d) X (d)
Signal X X X X
Warn X X X X
Switch off - - X -
Table 5-6: “Operation monitoring” response
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 5-7
5.3.2 Operating hours monitoring
The operating hours monitoring function offers the option of generating

maintenance prompts for the motor in good time.
Level
If the operating hours exceed the set synchronization level, the monitoring
function is activated.
Range:
Level 0 to 1193046 hours
Response
Here you can set the overshooting response.
"Important Notes" and table 5-6.
5.3.3 Stop time monitoring
In system parts for important processes, dual drives are often in operation
(A and B drives).
It must be assured here that these drives are always alternately run to avoid
long stop times and reduce the risk of non-availability.
The stop time monitoring function can be used, for example, to issue a
warning which causes the other motor not presently in operation to be con-
nected.
Level
The length of the stop time is set here. The monitoring function is activated
when this stop time interval is exceeded.
Range:
Level 0 to 65535 hours
Response
Here you can determine the response when the permissible stop time is
exceeded:
SIMOCODE pro
5-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
5.3.4 Monitoring the number of starts
The function for monitoring the number of starts is used to protect system
parts (motor, switching devices like e.g. soft starters and converters) against
too many impermissible start processes inside a parameterizable time
frame and thus to prevent damage from occurring. This is especially useful
for start-up or manual control.
The following schematic shows the principle of the function for monitoring
the number of starts.
1. Start within the time frame
Time frame Example:

3 starts allowed
Pre-warning Overshooting
Figure 5-5: Monitoring the number of starts
Permissible starts
The maximum number of starts is set here. With the first start, the time
interval “Start time frame” starts to run. After the second to the last permis-
sible start has been executed, a pre -warning “Another start permitted” is
issued.
Range:
Permissible starts 1 to 255
Start time frame

The time frame of the start process is set here. The maximum number of
starts is only available again after the parameterizable start time frame is
finished.
The available starts are shown by the analog value “Permissible starts -
actual value”.
Range:
Start time frame 0 to 65535 seconds
Overshooting response
Here you can set the response to be carried out when the permissible num-
ber of starts within the start time frame have been exceeded:
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 5-9
Pre-warning response
Here you can set the response to be carried out after the second to the last
start:
Interlocking time
If a new start command is issued within the time frame after the last per-
missible start has been carried out, this new start command will no longer
be executed by the setting “Overshoot response - switching off”. The “Fault
- number of starts >” and the set interlocking time is activated.
Range:
Interlocking time 0 to 65535 seconds
SIMOCODE pro
5-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Outputs 6
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on the outputs of
SIMOCODE pro:
• relay outputs
• light-emitting diodes of the operator panel
• signaling data on the PROFIBUS DP.
Target groups
• programmers.
Necessary knowledge
• PROFIBUS DP.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 6-1
Outputs
6.1 Introduction
Description
SIMOCODE pro has different outputs.

The outputs include, for example:
• output terminals , located on the outside of the basic units and digital
modules
• LEDs on the operator panel for visualizing the operating state
• outputs to the PROFIBUS DP.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the types of
outputs:
SIMOCODE pro
Plugs Output Output terminals
SIMOCODE pro
Plugs Output LEDs operator panel
SIMOCODE pro
Plugs Output DP PROFIBUS DP
Figure 6-1: General display of the types of outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Outputs

Outputs are used, e.g. for controlling motor contactors, displaying the sta-
tus or signaling via PROFIBUS DP. The system provides different outputs,
depending on the device series:
SIMOCODE
Outputs pro C pro V

(BU1) (BU2)
Number Number
Basic unit BU, outputs 1 to 3 ✓ ✓
Operator panel LEDs ✓ ✓
Digital module 1 “DM1 - output 1 to 2” — ✓
Digital module 2 “DM2 - output 1 to 2” — ✓
Acyclic signaling data ✓ ✓
Cyclic signaling data ✓ ✓
Table 6-1: Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 6-3
Outputs
6.2 Basic unit (BU)

Description
The basic unit has a “BU - output” function block with 3 relay outputs. You
can e.g. switch contactors or lamps using relay outputs. The inputs (plugs)
must be connected to the corresponding sockets. The “BU - output”
function block consists of
• 3 plugs, corresponding to the relay outputs Out1 to Out3
• 3 relays
• output terminals
In total there is:
– 1 “BU - output” function block for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the relay outputs:
SIMOCODE pro
BU - output
1 1 Terminal numbers
Out1
2 2
Out2
3
3
6
Out3
7
Output terminals
Figure 6-2: BU output schematic
Application examples
• Controlling the main contactor in the motor feeder:
You can e.g. define which relay output is used for controlling the motor con-
tactor in the motor feeder. For this, connect the desired relay output with the
corresponding “QE.” contactor control.
• Controlling lamps for displaying operating states:
You can e.g. define which relay outputs are used for controlling lamps/
LEDs which then display the operating states of the motor (fault, ON,
OFF, fast, slow...).
For this, connect the desired relay output to the corresponding “QL..”
contactor control. These are specially designed for controlling lamps and
LEDs:
The “QL...” lamp controls also automatically signal to the status displays
via a 2 Hz flashing frequency:
– test mode (QLE.../QLA lamp outputs are flashing)
– unacknowledged fault case (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing)
– passing on any other information, signals, warnings, faults, etc. to the
relay outputs
– lamp test: all QL outputs are activated for approx. 2s
SIMOCODE pro
6-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Outputs
Settings
BU output Description
Outputs 1 to 3 Controls the “BU-output” function block from an arbitrary signal

(optional sockets
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc. (usually
from the QE contactor controls)
Table 6-2: BU output settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 6-5
Outputs
6.3 Operator panel (OP)

Description
SIMOCODE pro has an “OP - LED” function block with 7 LEDs. The LEDs
are in the operator panel and can be used for arbitrary status displays. For
this, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets
(e.g. with the sockets for the status signals). The “OP - LED” function block
can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is connected and parameterized
in the device configuration! The “OP - LED” function block contains
• 4 inputs, “OP LED green 1” to “OP LED green 4”, corresponding to the green
LEDs. The green LEDs are optically/logically assigned to the buttons of the
operator panel. They usually display the feedback of the motor operating state
• 3 inputs, “OP - LED yellow 1” to “OP - LED yellow 3”, corresponding to the
yellow LEDs
• 4 green LEDs
• 3 yellow LEDs
In total there is:
– 1 “OP - LED” function block for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
OP - LED LEDs in the operator panel

Green 1
Green 2
Green 3 QL
Green 4
Yellow 1
Yellow 2
Yellow 3
Figure 6-3: OP LED schematic
• Displaying operating states:
You can e.g. define which LEDs are to be activated for displaying the motor
operating states (fault, ON, OFF, fast, slow...).
For this, connect the desired LED to the corresponding “QL” contactor con-
trol.
• Passing on any other information, signals, warnings, faults, etc. to the yellow
LEDs.
SIMOCODE pro
6-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Outputs
Settings
OP LED Description
Green 1 - green 4 Controls the “OP - LED” function block from an arbitrary signal
(arbitrary sockets ,
e.g. feedback operating state “motor”)
Yellow 1 - yellow 3 Controls the “OP - LED” function block from an arbitrary signal
(arbitrary sockets
e.g. displays for status, signals, faults)
Table 6-3: OP LED settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 6-7
Outputs
6.4 Digital modules (DM)

Description
Basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) provides the option of extending the num-
ber of inputs and outputs as well as their types by degrees via expansion
modules (digital modules).
The basic unit has 2 function blocks: “Digital module 1 - output” and “Digital
module 2 - output”, with 2 relay outputs each. You can e.g. switch contactors
or lamps via the relay outputs. For this, the inputs (plugs) must be connec-
ted to the corresponding sockets. Function blocks can only be used if the
corresponding digital modules (DM) are connected and parameterized in the
device configuration! Each function block contains
• 2 plugs, corresponding to the relay outputs Out1, Out2
• 2 relays
• output terminals
In total there is
– 1 function block “Digital module1 - output” BU2
– 1 function block “Digital module2 - output” BU2.
The following digital modules are available for basic unit 2:
Inputs Supply Outputs
4 inputs 24 V DC, external 2 monostable relay

outputs
4 inputs 110... 240V AC/DC, external 2 monostable relay

outputs
4 inputs 24 V DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs
4 inputs 110... 240V AC/DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs
Table 6-4: Digital modules variations
With the monostable version, the relay outputs open after switching off the
supply voltage. With the bistable version, the switching state of the relay
outputs remains intact even after switching off the supply voltage.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the relay outputs:
DM1 - output DM2 - output

1 1
Out1 Out1
2 Out2 2 Out2
Output terminals Output terminals
Figure 6-4: DM1 / DM2 output schematic
SIMOCODE pro
6-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Outputs
• Controlling the motor contactor in the motor feeder:
You can e.g. define which relay output is to be used for controlling the main
contactor in the motor feeder.
For this, connect the desired relay output with the corresponding “QE” con-
tactor control.
• Controlling lamps for displaying the operating states:
You can e.g. define which relay outputs are to be used for controlling the
lamps/LEDs which then display the motor operating states (fault, ON, OFF,
fast, slow...).
For this, connect the desired relay output with the corresponding “QL...”
lamp control.
• Passing on any other information, signals, warnings, faults, etc. to the relay
outputs.
Settings
DM1 / DM2 output Description
Output 1 to 2 Controls the “DM1 output” and “DM2 output” function blocks
from an arbitrary signal
(arbitrary sockets
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc. (usually
from the QE contactor controls)
Table 6-5: DM1 / DM2 output settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 6-9
Outputs
6.5 Cyclic signaling

Description
The “Cyclic signaling” function block is used to determine which informa-
tion is given cyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP. For this,
the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets.
The “Cyclic signaling” function block consists of
• 16 inputs (2 bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
• 1 input (2 bytes, byte 2 and 3 for analog information, one freely paramete-
rizable word)
• 1 output (PROFIBUS DP).
In total there is
– 1 “Cyclic signaling” function block for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
Byte 0
Bit 0 Cyclic signaling
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Byte 1 DP to PROFIBUS DP
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Byte 2/3
Input (analog)
Figure 6-5: Cyclic signaling data schematic
SIMOCODE pro
6-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Outputs
Cyclic services
Cyclic signaling data is exchanged once in every DP cycle between the DP
master and the DP slave. In this case, the DP master sends the cyclic con-
trol data to SIMOCODE pro. In response, SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic
signaling data to the DP master.
Settings
Acyclic signaling Description

data
Byte 0 to 1 Controls the bits with arbitrary signals

Bit 0 to bit 7 (arbitrary sockets
e.g. device inputs, signaling data, etc.)
Byte 2/3 Controls the word with arbitrary analog signals

(arbitrary sockets
e.g. maximum current Imax, remaining cooling time, actual value of
timers, etc.)
Table 6-6: Test settings
Byte 0 of the signaling data is already preset. Byte 2/3 is preset with the
max. current!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 6-11
Outputs
6.6 Acyclic signaling

Description
In addition to “Cyclic signaling”, it is also possible to transmit additional 16-
bit information to the PLC/PC via acyclic services.
The “Acyclic signaling” function block is used to determine which informa-
tion is given acyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP. For this,
the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets.
The “Acyclic signal” function block consists of
• 16 inputs (2 bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
• 1 logic component
• 1 output (PROFIBUS DP).
In total there is
• 1 function block “Acyclic signaling” for the BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
Byte 0
Bit 0 Acyclic signaling
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Byte 1 DP to PROFIBUS DP
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Figure 6-6: Acyclic signaling data schematic
SIMOCODE pro
6-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Outputs
Acyclic services
Acyclic signaling data is only transmitted on request.
The information (2 bytes) is in data record 203.
This data record can be read by every master (PLC or PC) which supports
the acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1.
Settings
Acyclic signaling Description

data
Byte 0 to 1 Controls the bits with arbitrary signals

Bit 0 to bit 7 (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, signaling data, state infor-
mation, fault signals, etc.)
Table 6-7: Test settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 6-13
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Inputs 7
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on the inputs of SIMOCODE pro.
The inputs include:
• the four inputs of the basic units (BU1, BU2)
• the four inputs of digital modules 1 and 2 (DM1, DM2).
Target groups
• planners.
Necessary knowledge
• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets.
Device parameters > Inputs.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 7-1
Inputs
7.1 Introduction
Description
SIMOCODE pro has different inputs (input terminals). These inputs provide
external information. They are interfaces from the outside to
SIMOCODE pro. These inputs become sockets inside SIMOCODE pro. The
inputs contain:
• input terminals , located on the outside of the basic units and digital
modules
• buttons on the operator panel (1 button test/reset, 4 freely parameterizable
buttons) and basic units (1 button test/reset)
• inputs from PROFIBUS DP.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the input
types:
SIMOCODE pro
Input terminals Input Sockets
SIMOCODE pro
Buttons
- Control commands Input Sockets
- Test/reset
SIMOCODE pro
PROFIBUS DP DP Input Sockets
Figure 7-1: General representation of the input types
SIMOCODE pro
7-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Inputs
Scope and application

Inputs are used, for example, for inputting external signals e.g. via pushbut-
tons, key-operated switches, etc. These external signals are processed fur-
ther internally via corresponding connections. Depending on the device
series, the system provides different inputs:
SIMOCODE
Inputs pro C pro V

(BU1) (BU2)
Number Number
Basic unit “BU - inputs 1 to 4” ✓ ✓
Operator panel buttons ✓ ✓
Digital module 1 “DM1 - inputs 1 to 4” — ✓
Digital module 2 “DM2 - inputs 1 to 4” — ✓
Acyclic control data ✓ ✓
Cyclic control data ✓ ✓
Table 7-1: Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 7-3
Inputs
7.2 Basic unit (BU)

Description
The basic unit has a function block “BU - input” with 4 grouped digital
inputs. You can connect e.g. the buttons for a local control station to the
inputs. In order for these signals to be further processed, the plugs of other
function blocks, e.g. a control station, must be connected to the correspon-
ding sockets.
The function block “BU - input” consists of
• input terminals , located on the outside of the basic unit, corresponding to
the sockets “BU - input 1” to “BU - input 4”
• 24 V DC internally for supplying the inputs of the basic unit
• outputs in the form of sockets in SIMOCODE pro which can be connected to
any plugs, e.g. to the control stations.
In total there is:
– 1 function block “BU - input” for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the inputs of the basic unit
24 V DC Basic unit (BU)

internally BU - Inputs
8
IN1 1
5
IN2 2
4
IN3 3
10
IN4 4
Terminal 9
numbers
Figure 7-2: Schematic BU - Input
Application example
The inputs can be used, for example, to connect the start and stop buttons
of the local control station - which can then be assigned to the “local con-
trol” internal control station.
Via the corresponding assignments, the input signals can be used to acti-
vate, for example, function blocks such as “Reset” or “External fault”.
SIMOCODE pro
7-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Inputs
Supplying the inputs

You have three possibilities for supplying the inputs:
• a): 24 V DC internal.
• b): 24 V DC external. However, input 3 is reference potential, i.e. 3 inputs are
available.
• c): 24 V DC external. Only possible for the basic unit with a supply
voltage of 24 V DC!
a) b) c)
24 V DC internal, 4 inputs usable 24 V DC external, 3 inputs usable 24 V DC external, 4 inputs usable
Basic unit (BU) Basic unit (BU) Basic unit (BU)
BU - input BU - input BU - input
IN1 1 IN1 1 IN1 1
IN2 2 IN2 2 IN2 2
IN3 3 IN3 3 IN3 3

(not usable)
IN4 4 IN4 4 IN4 4
A1
24 V DC
A2
Only possible for the basic unit

with a supply voltage of 24 V DC!
Figure 7-3: 24 V DC for supplying the inputs
Settings
Basic unit Description
Debounce time If necessary, you can set a debounce time for the inputs.
Inputs Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms (default setting: 16 ms).
Table 7-2: BU - input settings
All inputs work reaction-free, i.e. the signal states on the neighboring inputs
do not influence each other.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 7-5
Inputs
7.3 Digital modules (DM)

Description
The digital module has a function block “BU - input” with 4 grouped digital
inputs. You can connect e.g. the buttons for a local control station to the
inputs. In order for these signals to be further processed, the plugs of other
function blocks, e.g. a control station, must be connected to the correspon-
ding sockets.
The function block “DM - input” consists of
• input terminals , located on the outside of the digital module, correspon-
ding to the sockets “DM - input 1” to “DM - input 4”
• outputs in the form of sockets in SIMOCODE pro which can be connected to
any plugs, e.g. to the control stations.
In total there is:
– 1 function block “DM1 - Input” and “DM2 - Input” for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the inputs of the digital module
Digital module (DM)
N/M
DM - inputs
25
IN1 1
23
IN2 2
24
IN3 3
26
IN4 4
Terminal 27
numbers
Figure 7-4: Schematic of DM inputs
Application example
Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the number of binary
inputs and outputs on basic device 2.
• Up to 2 digital modules can be connected. Thus, 4 further binary inputs and 2
further binary outputs are available in each case.
• Supplying the inputs (only externally, not via BU1/2) 24 V DC or
110 V up to 240 V AC/DC.
SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of 12 binary inputs
and 7 binary outputs.
SIMOCODE pro
7-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Inputs
Supplying the inputs

There are two versions of the digital module:
• a): Digital module with 24 V DC input supply
• b): Digital module with 110 to 240 V AC/DC input supply.
a) b)
24 V DC external 110 V up to 240 V AC/DC external
Digital module (DM) Digital module (DM)
N/M DM - inputs N/M DM - inputs

~
IN1 1 IN1 1
IN2 2 IN2 2
IN3 3 IN3 3
IN4 4 IN4 4
Figure 7-5: Supplying the inputs for the digital module
Settings
Basic unit Description
Debounce time If necessary, you can set a debounce time for the inputs.
Inputs Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms. Default setting: 16 ms.
These values are valid for digital modules with a 24 V DC input sup-
ply.
For digital modules with a 110 to 240 V AC/DC input supply, the
values are about 40 ms higher.
Table 7-3: BU - input settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 7-7
Inputs
7.4 Cyclic controlling

Description
With the “Cyclic controlling” function block, you can transfer information
cyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP. For this, the inputs
(plugs) must be assigned to the corresponding outputs (sockets).
The function block “Cyclic controlling” consists of
• 16 outputs (2 byte, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
• 1 input PROFIBUS DP.
In total there is:
– 1 function block “Cyclic controlling” for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
Cyclic controlling Byte 0

Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
DP from PROFIBUS DP
Byte 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Figure 7-6: Schematic cyclic control data
Cyclic services
The cyclic data is exchanged once in every DP cycle between DP master
and DP slave. The DP master sends the cyclic control data (cyclic con-
trolling) to SIMOCODE pro. As a response, SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic
signal data (cyclic send) to the DP master.
SIMOCODE pro
7-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Inputs
7.5 Acyclic controlling

Description
In addition to “Cyclic controlling”, there is also the option of transferring fur-
ther 16-bit information via the function block “Acyclic controlling”.
You can determine which information should be transferred acyclically via
PROFIBUS DP to the automation system. For this, the outputs (sockets)
must be assigned to the corresponding plugs.
The function block “Acyclic controlling” consists of
• 16 outputs (2 byte, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
• 1 input (PROFIBUS DP).
In total there is:
• 1 function block “Acyclic controlling” for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
Acyclic controlling Byte 0

Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
DP from PROFIBUS DP
Byte 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Byte 2/3
Figure 7-7: Schematic of acyclic control data
Cyclic services
Acyclic data is only transferred on request.
The information (2 bytes) is in record 202.
This record can be read by every master (PLC or PC) which supports the
acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 7-9
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
7-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Standard Function Blocks 8
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about standard function blocks
which you can activate as required. Standard function blocks often contain
functions needed for motor feeders and are characterized by simple hand-
ling.
Target groups
• configurators
• programmers of application programs for comprehension purposes.
Necessary knowledge
• motor protection
• control functions, control stations.
More function blocks > Standard functions.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 8-1
Standard Function Blocks
8.1 Introduction
Description
The system also contains so-called “standard function blocks” which can be
used if required. They can contain:
• inputs (plug )
• outputs (sockets ) via a signal
• setting values, e.g. the response when external faults occur (“Signal”, “Warn”
or “Switch off”).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the general functioning of a standard
function block:
Input 1 Standard function block

Signal
Input n Setting value
Figure 8-1: General functioning of a standard function block
Scope and application

Standard function blocks work independently of the selected control
function and can be used as optional additions. They are already available,
and just have to be activated, which is achieved by wiring up the input
(“External fault” standard function block).
Depending on the device range, the system provides several function
blocks:
SIMOCODE
Standard function block pro C(BU1) pro V(BU2)
Number Number
Test 2 2
Reset 3 3
Test position feedback (TPF) 1 1
External fault 4 6
Operational protection off (OPO) — 1
Power failure monitoring (UVO) — 1
Emergency start 1 1
Watchdog (monitoring PLC/DCS) 1 1
Timestamping — 1
Table 8-1: Standard function blocks
SIMOCODE pro
8-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
8.2 Test/reset
Test/reset description
The function of the “test/reset” button is generally dependent on the opera-
ting status of the device:
• Reset function: when a fault occurs
• Test function: other operating statuses
The “Test” function block consists of:
• 1 Input
• a logic component (test/reset buttons locked).
In total there are:
• 2 Test 1 and Test 2 function blocks for BU1 and BU2:
– Test 1: with testing/switching off the output relays
– Test 2: without switching off the output relays (normally for a test via the
bus).
Schematic
Test/Reset
Test 1
Test 2
Reset 1
control functions
Reset 2
Reset 3
Botton "TEST/RESET" BU
Test/Reset buttons locked
Botton "TEST/RESET" OP
Figure 8-2: Schematic "Test/Reset"
Carrying out the test

The test can be carried out as follows:
• using the “test/reset” button on the basic unit and operator panel (can be
deactivated)
• “Test input 1/2” of the internal function block
The test function can be terminated at any time - it does not influence the
thermal motor model/overload function, i.e. after switching off using Test, it
can immediately be switched back again.
Switching off only occurs for Test 1 if the operation type is set to “Remote”.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 8-3
Reset function:
The reset function can be carried out as follows:
• using the “test/reset” button on the basic unit and operator panel (can be
deactivated)
• using the “Reset input” of the internal function blocks
The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets.
The “Reset” function block consists of:
• 1 Input.
In total there are:
– 3 function blocks, “Reset 1 to 3” for BU1 and BU2.
All reset inputs are equal (OR function).
Test function
A function test of SIMOCODE pro can also be installed using the test
function.
The test function contains the following steps:
• Lamp/LED test (test function activated < 2 s)
• Testing the device functionality (test function activated 2 to 5 s)
• Only for “Test 1”: Switching off the QE (test function activated > 5 s).
SIMOCODE pro
8-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Test phases
The following table shows the test phases carried out when the “test/
reset” button is pressed for the respective period of time:
Test Status Without main current With main current

phase
O.K. Fault *) O.K. Fault
Hardware test/lamp test
“DEVICE” LED Green Green Green Green

<2s
“GEN.FAULT”
LED
Contactor control Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged
Show QL*
Hardware/lamp test result
“DEVICE” LED Green Red Green Rot

2s-5s
“GEN.FAULT”
LED
Contactor control Unchanged Deactivated Unchanged Deactivated
Relay test
“DEVICE” LED Green Red Green Rot

>5s
“GEN.FAULT”
LED
Contactor control Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated
LED lit/activated LED flashing LED flickering LED off
*) “Fault” displayed after 2 s
Table 8-2: Statuses of the status LEDs/contactor controls during the test
Settings test
Test 1 to 2 - Description
Input Activates the “Test” function block from any signal

(any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from
PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Test/reset button The blue test/reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel
locked are designed for acknowledgement of faults and for carrying out
device tests.
The keys can be locked using “Test/reset button locked”. They can
then be used for other purposes.
Table 8-3: Settings test
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 8-5
Acknowledging reset fault

The following applies to the acknowledgement of faults:
• faults can be simply acknowledged
– when the cause of the fault has been eliminated
– if no “ON” control command is present.
• No reset will be carried out when a reset command is issued if the cause of
the fault or an “ON” control command is still present. The reset is saved,
depending on the type of fault. The saving of the reset is indicated by the
“GEN.FAULT” LED on the basic unit and the control panel. The LEDs change
from flashing to a continuous signal.
Automatic acknowledgement of fault reset

The acknowledgement of faults occurs automatically in the following cases:
• Case 1: A reset is saved and the cause of the fault disappears (user pre-
viously acknowledged)
• Case 2: An overload tripping or thermistor tripping is automatically reset if
motor protection reset = Auto (the acknowledgement occurs automatically
after the cooling off time expires). The motor cannot start immediately since a
reset cannot occur if an ON command is present.
• Case 3: If a configured module fails, all associated faults are automatically
acknowledged. However, a removal fault is generated (exception: operating
panel during the corresponding parameterization). This ensures that a module
fault does not cause the general fault to be acknowledged automatically.
• Case 4a: If a function or module is deactivated in the device configuration (via
a parameterization), all associated faults are acknowledged automatically (the
motor cannot start immediately since no parameter can be entered if an ON
command is present).
• Case 4b: If a function's parameter is changed from “Switch off” to “Warn”,
“Signal” or “Deactivated”, all associated faults are automatically acknowled-
ged.
• For an external fault: with its own parameter: “Auto reset”.
Reset setting
Reset 1 to 3 - Description
Input Activates the “Reset” function block from any signal

PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Test/reset button The blue test/reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel
locked are designed for acknowledgement of faults and carrying out
device tests.
The keys can be locked using “Test/reset button locked”. They can
then be used for other purposes.
Table 8-4: Reset setting
SIMOCODE pro
8-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
8.3 Test position feedback (TPF)

Description
You can carry out the “Cold starting” function test using the “test position
feedback (TPF)” function. The input (plug) must be connected to the corre-
sponding socket. The active test position is indicated by a flashing QL*.
The “Test position feedback (TPF)” function block consists of
• 1 Input
• 1 “Status - test position” output
This is set when a signal is connected to the input.
• 1 “Fault - test position feedback fault” output.
It is set when
– “TPF” is activated, even if current is flowing in the motor feeder
– “TPF” is activated, and current is flowing in the motor feeder
In total there is
– 1 “Test position” function block for BU1 and BU2.
Notice:
When the test position is activated, the QLE/QLA outputs are controlled by
flashing.
Schematic
Status -
TPF Test position
Input
Type Fault -
Feedback fault test position
Figure 8-3: “Feedback test position” schematic
Cold starting
If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is isolated from the
network. However, the control voltage is connected.
The “Cold starting” function test is carried out in this status. Cold starting is
defined as the testing of the motor feeder without a current in the main cir-
cuit.
This function must be activated via an input to differentiate this function
from normal operation.
The feedback that the motor feeder is isolated from the mains voltage can
be achieved using an auxiliary contact of the main switch in the motor fee-
der which is connected to any device input (terminal). This is then linked to
the “Test position feedback (TPF)” input.
Following this, the protection outputs can be set using the enabled control
stations (see chapter "Control stations" on page 4-2), which enables the cur-
rent-free status to be tested.
If current falsely flows during the test operation, the contactor outputs are
switched off with the message “Fault - Test position feedback fault”.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 8-7
“Fault - Test position feedback (TPF)” fault message and acknowledgement
Attention
“Fault - Test position feedback (TPF)” is generated when:
• “TPF” is activated, even if current is flowing in the motor feeder
• “TPF” is activated, and current is flowing in the motor feeder
It can be acknowledged using “Reset” or the “OFF/STOP” control com-

mand.
Settings
External fault Description

1 to 6 -
Input Controls the “test position feedback (TPF)” using any signal (any
sockets ,
e.g. device input)
Type Specifies the input logic

• NO contact (1-active)
• NC contact (0-active)
Table 8-5: Test position feedback (TPF) setting
SIMOCODE pro
8-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
8.4 External fault

Description
“External faults 1-6” can optionally be used to monitor any statuses and/or
external devices and to create fault messages. In order to do this, the inputs
(plugs) must be connected to any sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits
from PROFIBUS DP, etc.). Example: monitoring the rotational speed of the
motor using an external rotational-speed monitor.
The “External fault” function block consists of
• 2 inputs
• evaluation
• 1 “Signal - external fault” output. This is set when a signal is connected to
the input.
In total there are:
– 4 external fault function blocks (1 to 4) for BU1
– 6 external fault function blocks (1 to 6) for BU2.
Schematic
External fault 1 External fault 2

Input Input
Type Signal - Type Signal -
Effectiveness Ext. fault 1 Effectiveness Ext. fault 2
Response Response
Reset Reset
Reset Reset
(Labeling) (Labeling)

Input Input
Response Response
Reset Reset
Reset Reset

Input Input
Response Response
Reset Reset
Reset Reset
Figure 8-4: Schematic of external faults
Special reset possibilities:

A reset input is also available in addition to the other reset possibilities
(remote reset, test/reset button, OFF command reset). Furthermore, auto
reset can also be activated.
For this, see the chapter "“External fault” signal" on page 8-10.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 8-9
Settings
External faults Description

1 to 6 -
Input Activates the “External fault” function block using the monitored
signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from
PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Status:
Type Specifies the input logic:

• NC contact (0-active) (default setting)
Effectiveness Specifies in which motor operating status the external fault should
be evaluated:
• Always:
Always evaluate, regardless of whether the motor is running or
stationary.
• only when the motor is on:
Evaluation only when the motor is switched on.
Response Specifies the response to an external fault when activated using

the input. (See the following table and the Kapitel "Important
Notes")
Reset Acknowledges the “External fault” fault using any signal

PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Reset also through Specifies further (common) acknowledgement possibilities using

additional reset types:
• Test/reset button on the basic unit and the control panel (panel
reset)
• Remote reset: Acknowledgement though resets 1-3, DPV1,
“Reset” command
• Auto reset: Fault resets itself after the cause of the fault has been
eliminated (after removal of the activation signal)
• OFF command reset: “OFF” control command resets the fault.
(Labelling) No parameters. Optional labelling to describe the signal, e.g.

“´Rotational speed >”, e.g. using SIMOCODE ES.
Range: up to 10 characters
Table 8-6: External fault settings
“External fault” signal
Response External fault

Fault / switch off X
Warning X
Signal X
Disabled
Delay -
Table 8-7: “External fault” signal
SIMOCODE pro
8-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
8.5 Operational protection OFF (OPO)

8.5.1 Response for slider control function
Description
This function puts the slider into the safe mode. In order to do this, the
inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets (e.g. device
inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.).
The “Operational protection off” function block consists of
• 1 Input
• 1 “Status - OPO” output. This is set when a signal is connected to the input.
• 1 “Fault - OPO fault” output. It is set when the corresponding, safe end posi-
tion is reached.
In total there is:
– 1 function block Operational protection off (OPO) for BU2.
The following table shows the main functionality:
OPO Initial position when OPO occurs
Slider is open Slider opens Slider stop- Slider closes Slider is clo-
ped/off sed
Reaction to OPO
Parameterized Fault Fault Fault - -

“Slider clo- Reset: with Reset: with Reset: with
sed” response close com- close com- close com-
mand mand mand
Closes Closes Closes Closes
Parameterized - - Fault Fault Fault

“Slider open” Reset: with Reset: with Reset: with
response open command open command open command
Opens Opens Opens Opens
Table 8-8: Main functionality of Operational protection off (OPO) for slider control function
Schematic
Operational
Status -
protection off (OPO) Operational protection off (OPO)
Input
Slider response
Fault -
Type
Operational protection off (OPO)
Figure 8-5: Operational protection off (OPO) schematic
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 8-11
Settings
Operational Description
protection off
(OPO) -
Input Activates of the “Operational protection off” function block using

the monitored signal
(any sockets , e.g. device inputs, etc.)
Slider response Specifies the response for the slider control function when activa-
ted via the input:
• CLOSE: Slider goes to the “Closed” end position
• OPEN: Slider goes to the “Open” end position
Type Species the input logic

• NC contact (0-active)
Table 8-9: Operational protection off settings
Notes
• No “Fault - Operational protection off (OPO)” fault message is created if the
“OPO” command tries to move the slider to the position where it already is
or to the position towards which it is already heading.
• No other control command (counter command or stop command) is carried
out while “Operational protection off (OPO)” is active.
• The “Fault - Operation protection off (OPO)” fault message must be acknow-
ledged using the open or close control command, depending on the slider's
present end position.
• The acknowledgement is carried out even if the desired end position has not
yet been reached.
• The fault message can be used to diagnose the PROFIBUS DP.
8.5.2 Response to other control functions
Description
For other control functions, the following scenarios can be differentiated if
OPO is used:
• The motor is running: The motor switches off with a “Fault - Operational pro-
tection off (OPO)” fault.
• The motor is off. Initially no fault. The “Fault - Operational protection off
(OPO)” fault only occurs when the “ON command” is issued.
SIMOCODE pro
8-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
8.6 Power failure monitoring (UVO)

Description
The “Power failure monitoring (UVO)” is activated using the input. This is
achieved using an external relay.
Process (see process diagram below).
1) All contactors (QE) are immediately deactivated after the monitoring-input
relay/activation of the input (UVO) have been addressed.
2) The motor switches back into its previous status if the voltage returns within
the “Power failure time”. This can either take place immediately or an additio-
nal time delay can be included (restart delay).
3) If the “Power failure time” expires before the voltage returns, the device
signals a fault (UVO fault).
Condition: The SIMOCODE pro control voltage is buffered and is not inter-
rupted.
Schematic
UVO
Fault -
Power failure monitoring (UVO)
Input* Type
Power failure time
*Activation
Restart delay External power failure monitoring
Figure 8-6: Power failure monitoring (UVO) process diagram
1)
QE
2)
UVO
t
Power failure Power failure
time time
3)
Fault Fault
Figure 8-7: Power failure monitoring (UVO)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 8-13
Settings
Power failure Description

monitoring (UVO) -
Input Activates the “Power failure monitoring” function block using the
monitored signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits
from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Type Specifies the type of power failure monitoring:

• deactivated
• device supply is not interrupted
The control voltage from SIMOCODE pro remains constant.
The interruption of the mains voltage must be measured by a
separate voltage relay (for example).
Power failure time The time at which the power failure starts.
If the mains voltage returns within the power failure time period, all
the drives that were connected before the power failure are auto-
matically reconnected.
If the mains voltage does not return within this time period, the
drives remain disconnected and the “Fault - Power failure UVO”
fault message is generated.
The fault message can be acknowledged using “Reset” once the
mains voltage returns.
Range: 0 to 25.5 seconds
Restart delay (stag- The restart delay can be set so that not all motors restart at the
gered) same time (mains voltage would collapse again).
Range: 0 to 255 seconds
Table 8-10: Power failure monitoring settings
SIMOCODE pro
8-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
8.7 Emergency start

Description
The emergency start deletes the thermal memory from SIMOCODE pro
each time it is activated. This enables the motor to restart immediately after
an overload tripping.
This function can be used to:
– make an immediate restart/reset possible after an overload switch-off
– influence the operation of the thermal memory (motor model) if required.
Since the emergency start is edge-triggered, it is not possible for this
function to continuously affect the thermal motor model.
The emergency start is carried out as follows:
• Via the input. In order to do this, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to any
sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.).
The “Emergency start” function block consists of:
• 1 Input
• 1 “Status - emergency start carried out” output. It is set when the emer-
gency start is carried out.
In total there is:
– 1 emergency start function block for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
Status -
Emergency start Emergency start
Input carried out 1)
Figure 8-8: Emergency start schematic
Settings
Emergency start - Description
Input Activates the “Emergency start” function block using any signal
(any sockets , e.g. device inputs,
control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Table 8-11: Emergency start settings
1) The “Emergency start carried out” signal is triggered by the edge (input) and
reset when current flows.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 8-15
8.8 Watchdog (bus monitoring, PLC/DCS monitoring)

Description
The “Watchdog” standard function block monitors both the communication
with the PLC using PROFIBUS DP as well as the operating status of the PLC
in the “Remote” operation type.
Schematic
Bus monitoring:
With this type of monitoring, “Fault - Bus” is generated if
• “Bus monitoring” is active
• the cyclic data transfer between the PLC and SIMOCODE pro is interrupted,
e.g. by an interruption to the PROFIBUS DP connection when in the
“Remote” operation type (operation type switch S1=1 and S2=1).
• The “Status - Bus O.K.” can always be evaluated. If the SIMOCODE pro is
cyclically transferring data with PLC, the
“Status - Bus O.K.” is set to “1”.
Watchdog (Bus monit.)
Bus/PLC-fault - Reset Status - Bus O.K.

Cyclic communication
(Bus active)
Bus monitoring
Bus response
Bus fault
Figure 8-9: Bus monitoring
Response: Also see Table 8-13: “Bus fault” / “PLC/DCS fault” response and
Kapitel "Important Notes".
PLC/DCS monitoring:
With this type of monitoring, “Fault - PLC/DCS” is generated if
• “PLC/DCS monitoring” is activated.
• the PROFIBUS DP switches to the “CLEAR” status when in the “Remote”
operation type (operation type switch S1=1 and S2=1).
• “Status - PLC/DCS in Run” can always be evaluated. If the PROFIBUS DP is in
the “CLEAR” status, the “Status - PLC/DCS in Run” is set to “0”.
If the “PLC/DCS monitoring - input” is set by default to the “Cyclic control -
Bit 0.7” bit, the status of the PLC is deduced from this bit alone.
SIMOCODE pro
8-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Watchdog (PLC/DCS monit.)
Bus/PLC-fault - Reset
Cyclic communication Status - PLC/DCS in Run
Bus monitoring
PLC/DCS monitoring
Fault - PLC/DCS
PLC/DCS monitoring - input
(level sensitive)
Figure 8-10: PLC/DCS monitoring
Response: See also Table 8-13: “Bus fault” / “PLC/DCS fault” response and
Kapitel "Important Notes".
Watchdog - Description
PLC/DCS monito- Activates the “Watchdog” function block using the monitored
ring - input signal
(optional sockets , e.g. control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Bus monitoring • Activated:

If a bus fault occurs, the “Fault - Bus” fault message is genera-
ted, which must be acknowledged
• Deactivated:
No fault message
Monitoring • Activated:
PLC/DCS If an SPS fault occurs, the “Fault - PLC/DCS” fault message is
generated, which must be acknowledged
• Deactivated:
No fault message
Bus/PLC fault - You can select whether the faults are acknowledged automatically
reset or manually.
Range: Manual / automatic
Table 8-12: Watchdog settings
“Bus fault” / “PLC/DCS fault” response
Response Bus fault PLC/DCS fault

Fault X X
Warning - -
Signal - -
Not active X X
Table 8-13: “Bus fault” / “PLC/DCS fault” response
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 8-17
8.9 Timestamping
8.9.1 Time stamping in the fault memory
The time stamping in the fault memory is based on the operating hours of
SIMOCODE pro (resolution: 1 s).
The “Error/ Fault” events and “Mains on” are recorded. Each of these
events is annotated with a timestamp.
• Error / Fault:
The last 21 faults are stored in a ring buffer. The fault that occurs (rising edge)
is always recorded. A fault that is disappearing (falling edge) is not recorded.
• Mains on:
If the most recent entry was “Mains on”, this is not recorded multiple times.
Rather, the fault number is used as a network-on fault. This means that the
fault memory cannot be deleted by frequent ON/OFF operations.
Entry 1 is the most recent entry and entry 21 the oldest.
The data is displayed using the “SIMOCODE ES” software.
Example:
Screenshot
Figure 8-11: Example of event recording using the “SIMOCODE ES” software
SIMOCODE pro
8-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules 9
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the logic modules of
SIMOCODE pro. In addition to the predefined control functions, you can, for
example, implement logical functions, time relays functions and counter
functions.
Target groups
• configurators
• programmers.
Necessary knowledge
• basics of digital signal processing, e.g. timer, counter etc.
Further function blocks > Logic modules.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 9-1
Logic Modules
9.1 Introduction
Description
Freely programmable logic modules are function blocks that process input
signals and provide digital output signals. Logic modules can contain:
• inputs (plugs )
• an internal logic component
• outputs (sockets )
• settings, e.g. the time for a timer.
Schematic
The following schematic shows a general representation of a logic module:
Input 1
Logic module
Output
(Logic component)
Input n
Setting
Figure 9-1: General representation of a logic module

If you need any other additional functions for your application, you can use
the logic modules. These can be used, for example, to implement logical
functions, time relay functions and counter functions.
Depending on the device series, the system provides several logic modules:
SIMOCODE
BU1 BU2
Number Number
Truth tables for 3 inputs/1 output 3 6

Truth tables for 2 inputs/1 output — 2
Truth tables for 5 inputs/2 outputs — 1
Timers 2 4
Counters 2 4
Signal conditioners 2 4
Non-volatile elements 2 4
Flashing 3 3
Flickering 3 3
Limit monitor — 4
Table 9-1: Logic modules which can be programmed freely
SIMOCODE pro
9-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules
9.2 Truth table for 3I/1O

Description
The truth table for 3I/1O contains
• 3 inputs
• a logic component
• 1 output.
You can choose among 8 possible input conditions with which you want to
create an output signal.
In total there are:
– 3 truth tables, 1 to 3, for BU1
– 6 truth tables, 1 to 6, for BU2
Schematic
Input 1 Input 1
Truth table1, 3I/1O Truth table 2, 3I/1O
Input 2 Output Input 2 Output
Input 3 Input 3
Input 1 Input 1
Truth table 3, 3I/1O Truth table 4, 3I/1O
Input 3 Input 3
Input 1 Input 1
Truth table 5, 3I/1O Truth table 6, 3I/1O
Input 3 Input 3
Figure 9-2: Schematic truth tables for 3I/1O
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 9-3
Logic Modules
Example
You want to implement the following circuit:
Circuit: Truth table, input conditions colored in gray:
S1= S2= S3= K1=

Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Output
S1 S2
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0
0 1 0 0
S3
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
K1
1 0 1 1
K1 switches with: 1 1 0 0
(S1 or S2) and S3 1 1 1 1
or
S1 and S2 and S3
Figure 9-3: Example of a truth table
SIMOCODE pro
9-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules
Switching and parameterizing
L1
Circuit: K1
N
BU input BU BU output
1
S1 1 Input 1
Truth table 1, 3I/1O
2 Out1
S2 2 Input 2 Output
3
S3 3 Input 3
Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES Setting of bits

for output signals
Connecting inputs, i.e.
connecting the plugs with the sockets
Figure 9-4: Example circuit and parameterization for truth table for 3I/1O
Settings
Truth table for 1-6 Description

3I/1O -
Input 1 to 3 Activate the truth table with any signal

(any sockets
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Table 9-2: Settings for 3I/1O truth table
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 9-5
Logic Modules

Description
The truth table for 2I/1O contains
• 2 inputs
• 1 output.
create an output signal.
In total there are:
– 2 truth tables 7 to 8 for BU2
Schematic
Input 1 Input 1
Truth table 7 2I/1O Truth table 8 2I/1O
Output Output
Input 2 Input 2
Figure 9-5: Schematic for 2I/1O truth tables
Example
You want to implement the following circuit:
Circuit:
Truth table, input conditions
colored in gray:
S1= S2= K1=

S1 S2
Input 1 Input 2 Output
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
K1 K1 switches with : 1 1 1
S1 or S2
Figure 9-6: Example for 2I/1O truth table
SIMOCODE pro
9-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules

Description
The truth table 5I/2O contains
• 5 inputs
• 2 outputs.
create up to 2 output signals.
In total there are:
– 1 truth table 9 for BU2.
Schematic
Input 1
Truth table 9 for 5I/2O
Input 2 Output 1
Input 3
Input 4 Output 2
Input 5
Figure 9-7: Schematic 5I/2O truth table
Settings
Truth table 9 for 5I/ Description

2O -
Input 1 to 5 Activation by any signal

(any sockets
Table 9-3: Settings for truth table for 5I/2O
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 9-7
Logic Modules
9.5 Counters
Description
Counters are integrated in the SIMOCODE pro system. These are activated
via the inputs “+” or “-”.
The counter output switches to “1” when the preset limit is reached. The
counter is reset with “Reset”.
The current count value can be read out cyclically via the bus. It must be
entered as an analog value.
• Input +: increases actual value by 1
• Input –: decreases actual value by 1 (minimum: 0).
• Reset: resets the actual value to 0.
The counter contains
• 3 inputs (input +, input – and reset)
• a counter function
• 1 output.
In total there are:
– 2 counters 1 to 2 for BU1
– 4 counters 1 to 4 for BU2
Schematic
Input + Input +
Counter 1 Counter 2
Input – Output Input – Output
Reset Reset
Limit Limit
Input + Input +
Counter 3 Counter 4
Input – Output Input – Output
Reset Reset
Limit Limit
Figure 9-8: Schematic counter
Notes
Please observe the following notes:
• The time between the events to be counted depends on
– the input delay
– the device cycle time (see chapter “Technical data”).
• The actual value remains the same
– during parameterization or failure of supply voltage
– if there is a simultaneous input signal at input + and input -.
Notice:
When a reset is pending, the output is always 0.
SIMOCODE pro
9-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules
Settings
Counter 1 to 4 - Description
Input + Increases the actual value by 1

Activation by any signal
(any sockets
Input – Decreases the actual value by 1.

(any sockets
Reset Resets the counter to 0 (count value and output)

(any sockets
Limit The maximum value that can be reached when counting and where
the counter provides an output signal.
Range: 0 to 65535
Table 9-4: Counter settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 9-9
Logic Modules
9.6 Timer
Description of function
The timer contains
• 2 inputs (input and reset)
• 1 output.
If there is an input signal, the timer can provide an output signal with the
output response
– with closing delay
– with closing delay with memory
– with off delay
– with fleeting closing.
In total there are:
– 2 timers 1 to 2 for BU1
– 4 timers 1 to 4 for BU2
– timer current value.
Schematic
Input Input
Timer 1 Timer 2
Output Output
Type Type
Reset Reset
Value Value
Input Input
Timer 3 Timer 4
Output Output
Type Type
Reset Reset
Value Value
Figure 9-9: Schematic of timer
Note
The output is always 0 following a reset.
SIMOCODE pro
9-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules
Output response
With closing delay:
Input
Reset
Time
t t
Output
Closing delay with memory:
Input
Reset
Time
t
Output
With OFF delay:
Input
Reset
Time
t t
Output
With fleeting closing:
Input
Reset
Time
t
Output
Figure 9-10: Output response of the timer
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 9-11
Logic Modules
Settings
Timer 1 to 4 - Description
Input Activation by any signal

(any sockets ,
Reset Resets the timer to 0.

(any sockets ,
Type Various output responses

Range: with closing delay, closing delay with memory, with OFF
delay, with fleeting closing
Value Time during which the timer provides an output signal when activa-
ted, depending on the output response (type).
Range: 0 to 65535, unit 100 ms
Table 9-5: Timer settings
SIMOCODE pro
9-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules
9.7 Signal conditioner

Description
If there is an input signal, the signal conditioner can provide an output signal
with the output response
– not inverting
– inverting
– edge rising with memory
– edge falling with memory
You can select the type of output response.
The signal conditioner contains
• a logic
• 1 output.
In total there are:
– 2 signal conditioners for BU1 (signal conditioner 1 to 2)
– 4 signal conditioners for BU2 (signal conditioner 1 to 4).
Schematic
Input Input
Signal conditioner 1 Signal conditioner 2
Output Output
Reset Reset
Type Type
Input Input
Signal conditioner 3 Signal conditioner 4
Output Output
Reset Reset
Type Type
Figure 9-11: Schematic of the signal conditioner
Note
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 9-13
Logic Modules
Types of signals/output responses
Level not inverting
Input
Reset
Output
Level inverting
Input
Reset
Output
Edge rising with memory
Input
Reset
Output
Edge falling with memory

Input
Reset
Output
Figure 9-12: Types of signals/output response of the signal conditioners
SIMOCODE pro
9-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules
NOR function
You can implement a NOR function with the signal type “Level inverted”:
Input Reset Output Schematic

0 0 1
Input
1 0 0 Output
Reset
> 1
0 1 0 =
1 1 0
Table 9-6: NOR function
Settings
Signal conditioner Description

1 to 4 -

(any sockets ,
Reset Resets the signal conditioner to 0.

(any sockets ,
Type Different output responses

Range:
Level not inverted, level inverted without memory, edge rising with
memory, edge falling with memory
Table 9-7: Signal condition settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 9-15
Logic Modules
9.8 Non-volatile elements

Description
Non-volatile elements behave like signal conditioners.
The output signals remain after failure of the supply voltage.
If there is an input signal, the signal conditioner can provide an output signal
with the output response
– not inverting
– inverting
– edge rising with memory
– edge falling with memory
You can set the output response.
The non-volatile element contains
• a logic
• 1 output.
In total there are:
– 2 non-volatile elements1 to 2 for BU1
– 4 non-volatile elements1 to 4 for BU2
Schematic
Input Input
Non-volat. elem. 1 Non-volat. elem. 2
Output Output
Reset Reset
Type Type
Input Input
Non-volat. elem. 1 Non-volat. elem. 2
Output Output
Reset Reset
Type Type
Figure 9-13: Schematic for non-volatile elements
Note
SIMOCODE pro
9-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules
Types of signals/output responses
Level not inverted
Input
Reset
Output
Level inverted
Input
Reset
Output
Edge rising with memory

Voltage failure
Input
Reset
Output
Edge falling with memory

Voltage failure
Input
Reset
Ausgang
Figure 9-14: Signal types/output responses of non-volatile elements
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 9-17
Logic Modules
NOR function
You can implement a NOR function with the “level inverted” type of signal:
Input Reset Output Schematic

0 0 1
Input
1 0 0 Output
Reset > 1
0 1 0 =
1 1 0
Table 9-8: NOR function
Settings
Non-volatile Description
elements
1 to 4 -

(any sockets
Reset Resets the signal conditioner to 0.

(any sockets
Type Different output responses

Range: Level not inverted, level inverted without memory, edge
rising with memory, edge falling with memory
Table 9-9: Non-volatile elements settings
SIMOCODE pro
9-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules
9.9 Flashing
Description
With the “flashing” function blocks, you can e.g. assign the “flashing”
function to the operator panel LEDs (for example).
The “flashing” function block provides an output signal with a frequency of
2 Hz if there is an input signal. The function block contains
• 1 input
• flashing frequency
• 1 output.
In total there are:
– 3 flash function blocks, 1 to 3, for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
Flashing 1 Flashing 2
Input Output Input Output
Flashing 3
Input Output
Figure 9-15: Schematic for flashing
Settings
Flashing 1 to 3 - Description

(any sockets ,
e.g. device inputs, signals, status, etc.)
Table 9-10: Flashing settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 9-19
Logic Modules
9.10 Flickering
Description
With the “flickering” function blocks, you can e.g. assign the “flickering”
function to the operator panel LEDs (for example).
The “flickering” function block provides an output signal with a frequency of
4 Hz if there is an input signal.
The function block contains
• 1 input
• flickering frequency
• 1 output.
In total there are:
– 3 flickering functions, 1 to 3, for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
Flickering 1 Flickering 2
Input Output Input Output
Flickering 3
Input Output
Figure 9-16: Schematic for flickering
Settings
Flickering 1 to 3 - Description

(any sockets ,
e.g. signals, etc.)
Table 9-11: Flickering settings
SIMOCODE pro
9-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules
9.11 Limit monitor

Description
Any analog signals (length: 2 bytes) can be monitored for limit overshooting
or undershooting. The limit monitor provides a “Signal - limit” output signal.
Example: Monitoring the mains voltage for overvoltage.
The limit monitor contains
• 1 analog input
• 1 output.
In total there are:
– 4 limit monitors 1 to 4 for BU2
Schematic
Limit monitor 1 Limit monitor 2

Limit value 1 Limit value 2
Limit Limit
Input (analog) Input (analog)
Effectiveness Effectiveness
Response Response
Limit monitor 3 Limit monitor 4

Limit value 3 Limit value 4
Limit Limit
Input (analog) Input (analog)
Effectiveness Effectiveness
Response Response
Figure 9-17: Schematic of limit monitor
Response
Response Limit 1 to 4
Switch off -
Warn -
Signal X (d)
Disabled -
Delay 0 to 25.5 s
Table 9-12: Response of the limits
See also “Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro” in chapter "Important

Notes".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 9-21
Logic Modules
Settings
Limit monitor - Description
Input Activation of the word via any analog signals

(any sockets ,
(analog, 2 bytes) e.g. maximum current Imax, remaining cooling time, actual value of
timers, etc.)
Type Specifies if the limit has to be monitored for overshooting or

undershooting.
Effectiveness Determines in what motor operating state the limit monitor is to be

analyzed:
• on, i.e. always analyze, independent of whether the motor is run-
ning or not (default)
• on+, i.e. always analyze, independent of whether the motor is
running or not
Exception: 'TPF', i.e. motor feeder is in test position.
• run, i.e., analyze only if the motor is in the ON state (TPF)
• run+, i.e. analyze only if the motor is running and the start-up pro-
cedure is finished (i.e. the “Start active” message is not applied)
and there is no test position (TPF); Example: Monitoring the
power factor
Limit Operating value of monitoring. The return value is always determi-

ned by the “Limit monitor - delay” parameter.
Range: 0 to 65535.
Delay Specifies the time period for which the limit must be constantly
exceeded before the “Signal - limit” output is set.
Range: 0 to 25.5 seconds.
Table 9-13: Limit monitor settings
Functional principle
The limit signal issued depends on
• the operating state of the motor
• the TPF function
• the parmeterized “effectiveness”:
– on
– on+
– run
– run+.
SIMOCODE pro
9-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Logic Modules
The following display shows a flow chart with the different “effectiveness”
parameters.
Class-time
Off Start Motor is running Off
“On”
Not with TPF “On+”
Not with TPF “Run”
Not with TPF “Run+”
Figure 9-18: Functional principle of the limit monitor
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 9-23
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
9-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Communication 10
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the possibilities of SIMO-
CODE pro communication, e.g. with a PLC. The presetting of the control,
signaling and diagnostic data is sufficient for almost all applications so that
the parameterization only has to be changed a little. Otherwise, you can
adapt the settings of the individual bits specifically for your application.
Target groups
• configurators
Necessary knowledge
• knowledge about PROFIBUS DP.
You will find the following dialogs in SIMOCODE ES:
Device parameters > Bus parameters
Further function blocks > Outputs >Acyclic signaling data
Further function blocks >Outputs >Cyclic signaling data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 10-1
Communication
10.1 Introduction
10.1.1 Definitions
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS bus system with the DP protocol. DP stands for decentralized
periphery. The main task of PROFIBUS DP is fast cyclic data exchange bet-
ween the central DP master and the periphery devices.
PROFIBUS DPV1
PROFIBUS DPV1 is an extension of the DP protocol. With this, acyclic data
exchange of parameter, diagnostic, control and test data is also possible.
DP master
A master is designated as a DP master if it works with the DP protocol
according to the EN 50 170 norm, volume 2, PROFIBUS.
Class 1 master
A class 1 master is an active station on the PROFIBUS DP. Characteristic is
the cyclic data exchange with other stations. Typical class 1 masters are, for
example, PLCs with a PROFIBUS DP connection.
Class 2 master
A class 2 master is an optional station on the PROFIBUS DP. Typical class 2
masters are, for example,
• PC/programing devices with the SIMOCODE-ES professional software
• SIMATIC PDM (PCS7)
• PC with SIMARIS manager software (power management).
DPV1 slave
A slave is designated as a DPV1 slave if it is operated on the PROFIBUS bus
with the PROFIBUS DP protocol and works according to the EN 50 170
norm, volume 2, PROFIBUS.
GSD (device data)

Device data (GSD) contains DP slave descriptions in a standard format.
Using GSD (device data) makes it easier to parameterize the DP slave in a
DP master system.
OM SIMOCODE pro
OM SIMOCODE pro (object manager) is used instead of GSD (device data)
to integrate SIMOCODE pro into STEP 7.
OM SIMOCODE pro enables the use of SIMOCODE ES Professional (if it is
installed) for parameterizing within STEP7.
SIMOCODE pro
10-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Communication
SIMOCODE pro S7 slave

SIMOCODE pro S7 slave is a slave which is fully integrated into Step7 and
has the following characteristics. It is connected via OM SIMOCODE pro
instead of GSD (device data). It supports the S7 model (diagnostic alarms,
process alarms)
Writing data
Writing data means that data is transmitted to the SIMOCODE pro system.
Reading data
Reading data means that data is transmitted from the SIMOCODE pro
system.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 10-3
Communication
10.2 Transmitting data

Options for data transfer
The following figure shows the options for data transfer:
Class 1 master Class 2 master
SIMATIC S7 with PROFIBUS DP PC or programming device
communication processor with SIMOCODE ES Profes-
sional
Maximum of two
class 2 masters
possible
Data transfer to class 1 PROFIBUS DPV1 norm extension: parameterizing,

master, depending on the diagnostics, controlling, signaling, testing via
slave mode of operation: PROFIBUS DPV1
(table below, “slave
modes of operation”)
PC/programming device e.g. with

SIMOCODE ES Smart
Parameterizing, diagnostics, controlling, signaling,
testing via system interface
Figure 10-1: Options for data transfer
Communication principle
The following figure shows the communication principle where, depending
on the master and slave modes of operation, different data is transmitted:
Class 1 master Class 2 master (max. 2)

PLC-CPU
Cyclic I/O Acyclic Acyclic Acyclic
PC or DCS
e.g.
SIMOCODE ES
Professional
PLC
Communication processor
Configuration GSD
Start-up
parameter
block
SIMOCODE pro
Diagnostics Alarms Parameters

3UF7 Data records Data records
DPV0
Cycl. signaling data
Cycl. control data DPV1 DPV1
Figure 10-2: Communication principle
SIMOCODE pro
10-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Communication
Slave modes of operation

The following table shows an overview of the slave modes of operation
which SIMOCODE pro can be operated with on the class 1 master:
SIMOCODE pro Class 1 master Class 1 master S7 master

connected as:
DP master DP master
manufacturer- manufacturer-
independent, independent,
without DPV1 alarms with DPV1 alarms
DPV1 slave • Cyclical data transfer • Cyclic data transfer • Cyclic data transfer
via GSD (device • Norm diagnostics • Norm diagnostics • Norm diagnostics
data) • Status messages • Status messages • Status messages
• Parameterization star- • Process and diagnostic • Process and diagnostic
ting (only BU1) alarm alarm
• Acyclic writing and rea- • Parameterization star- • Parameterization star-
ding of DPV1 data ting (only BU1) ting (only BU1)
records (if supported by • Acyclic writing and rea- • Acyclic writing and rea-
the master) ding of DPV1 data ding of DPV1 data
records records
S7 slave • Cyclic data transfer

via OM • Norm diagnostics
SIMOCODE ES • Process and diagnostic
— — alarm
• Parameterization star-
ting
• Acyclic writing and rea-
ding of DPV1 data
records
Figure 10-3: Slave modes of operation of SIMOCODE pro
Preparing the data transfer

SIMOCODE pro must be connected to a DP master system for data trans-
fer.
For this, you must configure in two places:
• You must decide on one of the options in the above-mentioned table
(GSD (device data) or OM)
• You must prepare SIMOCODE pro e.g. with SIMOCODE ES. There you can
set the following parameters in the dialog Device parameters > Bus para-
meters:
– DP address
– diagnostics
– start-up parameter block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 10-5
Communication
10.3 Configuring SIMOCODE pro

10.3.1 Configuring with a GSD file
Definition of GSD
Device data (GSD) contain DP slave descriptions in a standard format. Using
GSD (device data) makes it easier to configure the DP master and the DP
slave.
Connecting SIMOCODE pro as a norm slave with a GSD file

You configure SIMOCODE pro via the GSD file. SIMOCODE pro is connec-
ted as a standard slave in your system via the GSD file.
You can download the GSD file
• from the Internet under
http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_d/gsd (under Schaltgeräte i.e. switchgear).
• via a modem under the telephone number +49 (0)911 737972.
The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro C:

• SI0180FD.GSG (German)
• SI0180FD.GSE (English)
The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro V:

• SI1180FD.GSG (German)
• SI1180FD.GSE (English)
Attention
If you want to use the complete functionality of SIMOCODE pro
(e.g. timestamping), your configuration tool must support GSD files - rev.5,
like e.g. STEP7 V5.3 and higher.
SIMOCODE pro
10-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Communication
Integrating the GSD file into the configuration software

The following table describes how to integrate the GSD file into
SIMATIC S7:
Step STEP 7, from V5.1 + SP2
1 Start STEP 7 and call the menu command

Extras > Install new GSD file in the HW configuration.
2 In the following dialog, select the GSD file to be installed and confirm
with OK.
Result:
The field device is displayed in the hardware catalog in the PROFIBUS DP
directory.
Insert from the SIMOCODE pro hardware catalog under

Further field devices >Switchgear > SIMOCODE pro >
SIMOCODE pro V (GSD) (device data) or
SIMOCODE pro C (GSD) (device data) on the PROFIBUS.
3 Configure SIMOCODE pro with STEP 7 (see integrated help in STEP 7).
Table 10-1: Integrating the GSD file into the configuration software
Parameterizing via GSD
Attention
Parameterization via GSD is only designed for SIMOCODE pro C.
The GSD for SIMOCODE pro V does not contain any device parameters.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 10-7
Communication
10.3.2 Configuring with the SIMOCODE ES software
You can also configure SIMOCODE pro via the SIMOCODE ES software.
There are several options available for this:
• SIMOCODE ES Smart, for parameterizing via system interface.
Order number: 3ZS1 312-1CC10-0YA0
• SIMOCODE ES Professional, for parameterizing via the DPV1 interface and
system interface. This version contains the object manager (OM)
SIMOCODE pro. This enables the connection of SIMOCODE pro as an S7
slave in STEP7 and the integration in STEP7.
Order number: 3ZS1 312-2CC10-0YA0.
There you will find SIMOCODE pro under Switchgear > SIMOCODE pro.
10.3.3 Configuring with SIMATIC PDM
You can also configure SIMOCODE pro via the SIMATIC PDM
(Process Device Manager) software.
There are several options available for this:
• SIMATIC PDM as a stand-alone program
Prerequisite:
Programming device/PC with PROFIBUS DP interface which is supported by
SIMATIC PDM. SIMOCODE pro is parameterized via PROFIBUS DP.
• SIMATIC PDM integrated into STEP7
Prerequisite for data record routing:
SIMATIC S7-400 with PROFIBUS DP interface connection which supports the
whole data record routing for the parameterization of field devices
(CP443-5 Extended) or with IE/PB link.
Note
Note that the parameter block must be set so that the parameters will not
be overwritten by the start-up parameterization!
SIMOCODE pro
10-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Communication
10.4 Telegram description

Cyclic data
The cyclic data is exchanged once every DP cycle between the
PROFIBUS DP master and DP slave. The PROFIBUS DP master module
then sends the control data to SIMOCODE pro. As a response,
SIMOCODE pro sends the signaling data to the master module.
By parameterizing SIMOCODE pro, you can select between two basic types
which determine the contents of the cyclic data:
• Cyclic data from the PROFIBUS DP master to SIMOCODE pro:
Specification Length Specification Info
Basic type 1 4 bytes control data Cyclic controlling - bit
(available from the middle 0.0 to 1.7 BU2
of 2005)
Cyclic controlling - ana-
log value
Basic type 2 2 bytes control data Cyclic controlling - bit BU1
0.0 to 1.7 BU2
• Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP master:

Basic type 1 10 bytes Cyclic signaling - bit 0.0
(available from the middle Signaling data to 1.7 BU2
of 2005)
Cyclic signaling - analog
input 1 to 4
Basic type 2 4 bytes signaling Cyclic signaling - bit 0.0
data to 1.7 BU1
BU2
Cyclic signaling - analog
input 1
Diagnostic data/alarms
The diagnostic data contains important information about the status of
SIMOCODE pro. This simplifies troubleshooting.
In contrast to the cyclic data, the diagnostic data is only transmitted to the
master module if it changes.
PROFIBUS DP differentiates between:
• Norm diagnostics
• Status messages
• Process and diagnostic alarms according to DPV1.
You will find the detailed description in the appendix.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 10-9
Communication
Starting up parameter data

For every start-up of SIMOCODE pro on PROFIBUS DP, parameters are
transmitted to the device.
Depending on the master module used, norm parameters or norm parame-
ters + SIMOCODE pro parameters are transmitted.
Notice:
If the effective device parameters of SIMOCODE pro are overwritten by the
start-up parameters, start-up parameter block = no must be set. For start-up
parameter block = yes, the start-up parameters are discarded and the effec-
tive SIMOCODE pro parameters remain active.
• The start-up parameters are set with

• the configuration tool when the GSD file is loaded (only BU1)
• with OM SIMOCODE ES Professional (when connected as an S7 slave).
Acyclic writing and reading of data records

You can use these functions according to DPV1 if the DP master supports
this. Part of these are the acyclic DPV1 services for reading and writing data
records. With this, operator control, process monitoring and parameteriza-
tion is possible during runtime.
10.5 Process image (cyclic data) and data records (acyclic

data)
Process image
The process image is part of the system memory of the DP master. At the
start of the cyclic program, the signal states of the inputs are transmitted to
the process image of the inputs. At the end of the cyclic program, the pro-
cess image of the outputs is transferred as a signal state to the DP slave.
Data records
Data records contain additional information which can only be read/partly
written. Data record 67 contains the information about the process image of
the outputs. Data record 69 contains the information about the process
image of the inputs. Both these data records can only be read.
You will find further information on the data records in chapter "Data For-
mats and Data Records" starting from page B-1.
SIMOCODE pro
10-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Communication
10.6 Diagnostics with STEP 7

10.6.1 Reading out the diagnostics
Length of the diagnostic telegram

• The telegram has a maximum length of 62 bytes.
Options for reading out the diagnostics
Automation system Block or register Application See...

with DP master in STEP 7
SIMATIC S7/M7 SFC 13 Reading out slave diagnostics chapter "Configuring the
“DP NRM_DG” (store in the data region of the slave diagnostics" on
user program) page 10-12; SFC see
online help in STEP 7
Table 10-2: Reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7
Example for reading out the S7 diagnostics with SFC 13 “DP NRM_DG”
Here you will find an example of how to read out the slave diagnostics for a
DP slave in the STEP 7 user program with the SFC 13.
Assumptions
The following assumptions apply for this STEP 7 user program:
• The diagnostic address is 1022 (3FEH).

• The slave diagnostics should be stored in DB82: From the address 0.0,
length 62 bytes.
• The slave diagnostics consist of 62 bytes.
STEP 7 user program
STL (statement list) Explanation
CALL SFC 13
REQ :=TRUE read request

LADDR :=W#16#3FE diagnostic address
RET_VAL :=MW0 RET_VAL from SFC 13
RECORD :=P#DB82.DBX 0.0 BYTE 62 data compartment for diagnostics in the DB82
BUSY :=M2.0 read process runs over several OB1 cycles
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 10-11
Communication
10.6.2 Configuring the slave diagnostics
Configuring the slave diagnostics
Byte 1
Byte 2 Station status 1 to 3
Byte 3
Byte 4 Master PROFIBUS address
Byte 5 High byte Manufacturer's

Byte 6 Low byte identification
Byte 7
Byte 8 Identification-related diagnostics
Byte 9
.. Status message
Details
Byte 28 .
Byte 29
Byte 30
..
Byte 31
.. Channel-related diagnostics
.
up to max. .
(3 bytes per entry)
Byte 34
Byte 35
..
. .. Alarms OB40
OB82
up to max.
Byte 62
.
Figure 10-4: Configuring the slave diagnostics
Attention
The length of the diagnostic telegram varies between 28 and 62 bytes.
You will find the length of the last diagnostic telegram received in
• STEP 7 from the RET_VAL parameter of the SFC 13.
SIMOCODE pro
10-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Communication
10.6.3 Station status 1 to 3
Definition
Station status 1 to 3 gives an overview of the state of a
DP slave.
Station status 1
Bit Meaning Cause/corrective measures
0 1:The DP slave cannot be addressed by • Is the correct PROFIBUS address set on the DP
the DP master. slave?
• Is the bus connection plug connected?
• Voltage on the DP slave?
• RS-485 repeater configured correctly?
• Reset implemented on the DP slave?
1 1:The DP slave is not yet ready for the • Wait, as the DP slave is just starting-up.
data transfer.
2 1:The configuration data sent from the DP • Correct station type or correct configuration of
master to the DP slave does not corre- the DP slave in the configuration software?
spond to the configuration of the
DP slave.
3 1:There are external diagnostics present • Evaluate the identification-related diagnostics,
(general diagnostic display) the status messages and/or the channel-related
diagnostics. As soon as all errors are rectified,
bit 3 is reset. The bit is reset if there is a new
diagnostic message in the bytes of the above-
mentioned diagnostics.
4 1:The function required is not supported • Check the configuration.
by the DP slave (e.g. changing the PRO-
FIBUS address via software).
5 1:DP master cannot interpret the • Check the bus configuration.
response of the DP slave.
6 1:The DP slave type does not correspond • Is the correct station type entered in the confi-
to the software configuration. guration software?
7 1:The DP slave has been parameterized by • Bit is always 1 when you are e.g. accessing the
another DP master (not by the DP DP slave from the programming device or from
master which has access to the DP another DP master.
slave at the moment). The PROFIBUS address of the DP master which
parameterized the DP slave is in the “Master
PROFIBUS address” diagnostic byte.
Table 10-3: Configuring the station status 1 (byte 0)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 10-13
Communication
Station status 2
Bit Meaning
0 1:The DP slave must be parameterized anew.
1 1:There is a diagnostic message. The DP slave does not work until the error is
rectified (static diagnostic message).
2 1:The bit is always “1” when the slave is present with this PROFIBUS address.
3 1:The address monitoring is activated for this slave.
4 1:The DP slave received the “FREEZE” control command1).
5 1:The DP slave received the “SYNC” control command1).
6 0: Bit is always “0”.
7 1:The DP slave is deactivated, i.e. it is decoupled from the current
processing.
1) Bit is only updated if another diagnostic message is changed.
Table 10-4: Configuring station status 2 (byte 1)
Station status 3
Bit Meaning
0 to 6 0: Bits are always “0”.
7 1: • There are more diagnostic messages than the DP slave can save.
• The DP master cannot enter all diagnostic messages sent from the
DP slave into its diagnostic buffer (channel-related diagnostics).
Table 10-5: Configuring station status 3 (byte 2)
SIMOCODE pro
10-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Communication
10.6.4 Master PROFIBUS address
Definition
The PROFIBUS address of the DP master (class 1 master) is stored in the
Master PROFIBUS address diagnostic byte:
• which the DP slave parameterized and
• which has read and write access to the DP slave.
The master PROFIBUS address is in byte 4 of the slave diagnostics.
10.6.5 Manufacturer's identification
Definition
There is a code stored in the manufacturer's identification which describes
the DP slave type.
Manufacturer's identification
Byte 5 Byte 6 Manufacturer's identification for

80H FDH SIMOCODE pro
Table 10-6: Configuration of the manufacturer's identification
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 10-15
Communication
10.6.6 Identification-related diagnostics
Definition
The identification-related diagnostics begins at byte 7 and is 2 bytes long.
Identification-related diagnostics
The identification-related diagnostics is configured as follows:
7 6 5 0 Bit number:
Byte 7 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 = 0x42
Length of the identification-related diagnostics

including byte 6 (= 2 bytes)
Code for identification-related diagnostics
7 6 5 0 Bit number
Byte 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x GSD (device data)
0: Identification-related diagnostics are not available

1: Identification-related diagnostics are available
7 6 5 0 Bit number
Byte 8 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 0 OM SIMOCODE pro
0: Identification-related diagnostics are not available

1: Identification-related diagnostics are available
Figure 10-5: Configuration of the identification-related diagnostics
SIMOCODE pro
10-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Communication
10.6.7 Status messages
Definition
The status messages yield the detailed status of SIMOCODE.
Status messages configuration

The status messages are configured as follows:
7 6 5 0 Bit number
Byte 9 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 = 0x14
Length of the status message

including byte 9 (= 20 bytes)
7 0
Byte 10 0x81 Status message
7 0
Byte 11 x Slot number GSD: 0x01
OM SIMOCODE pro: 0x04
Byte 12 0x00
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
Byte 13
..
. Detailed status
Byte 28
Figure 10-6: Status messages configuration
You will find the detailed messages in the section "Detailed messages of the
slave diagnostics" in chapter "Detailled signals of the slave diagnosis" on
page A-13.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 10-17
Communication
10.6.8 Channel-related diagnostics
Definition
Channel-related diagnostics give information about device errors from
SIMOCODE pro and represent a more detailed version of the identification-
related diagnostics.
Channel-related diagnostics
The channel-related diagnostics are configured as follows:
7 6 5 0 Bit number
Byte 29 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0x80 GSD
0x83 OM SIMOCODE pro
Code for channel-related diagnostics
7 6 5 0 Bit number
Byte 30 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
Input/output channel
7 6 5 0 Bit number
Byte 31 0 0 0
Error type 9 or 16 (table below)
Channel type:
000B: No special channel type
Byte 32 to Next channel-related diagnostics message

Byte 34 (Allocation as for byte 29 to 31)
Figure 10-7: Configuring the channel-related diagnostics
Error types
The diagnostic message is signaled on channel 0.
Error Error type Meaning/cause

numb
er
F9 01001: • Internal error/device error
Error • Error on self-test Exact information in
• Switchgear defective data record 92
F16 10000: • Incorrect parameter value
Parameterization
error
Table 10-7: Error types
SIMOCODE pro
10-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Communication
10.6.9 Alarms
Diagnostic alarm
Device errors or parameter errors are alarm sources for diagnostic alarms.
As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a diagnostic alarm, the OB 82 diagnostic
alarm is started in the SIMATIC-S7.
Process alarm
Process messages, warnings and errors are alarm sources for process
alarms. Configuring the process alarms is the same as for the status messa-
ges. As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a process alarm, the OB 40 process
alarm is started in the SIMATIC-S7.
Process alarm configuration
7 6 5 0 Bit number
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 = 0x14
Length of the process alarm

including header byte (= 20 bytes)
7 0
0x02 Process alarm
7 0
x Slot number GSD: 0x01
OM SIMOCODE pro: 0x04
0x00
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
..
. Detailed status
Figure 10-8: Configuring alarm configuration
You will find the detailed messages in the section "Detailed messages of the
slave diagnostics" in chapter "Detailled signals of the slave diagnosis" on
page A-13.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 10-19
Communication
10.6.10 Data records - overview
Data record Description Read/write

number
67 Process image of the outputs Read
69 Process image of the inputs Read
92 Device diagnostics Read
94 Measured values Read
95 Display and statistics data Read/write
130 Basic device parameter 1 Read/write
131 Basic device parameter 2 Read/write
132 Extended device parameter 1 Read/write
133 Extended device parameter 2 Read/write
139 Labeling Read/write
160 Communication parameters Read/write
165 Comment Read/write
202 Free acyclic control data Read/write
203 Free acyclic signaling data Read
224 Password protection Write

Table 10-8: Data records - overview
SIMOCODE pro
10-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Mounting, Wiring and Interfaces 11
In this chapter
This chapter contains information about how the individual SIMOCODE pro
components are mounted and wired.
Target groups
• mechanics
• electricians
• maintenance and service personnel.
Necessary knowledge
• Basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 11-1
Mounting, Wiring and Interfaces
11.1 General information about mounting and wiring

Notes
Warning
Dangerous electrical voltage! Can cause electrical shock and burns. Discon-
nect the device from the system before beginning work.
Attention
Follow the information contained in the operating manual.
Fixing lugs for screw attachments
Attention
For technical reasons, there are two sorts of mounting lugs for screw attach-
ments:
For basic units and expansion modules: Order no. 3RP1903
For current measurement modules,
45 mm and 55 mm width: Order no. 3RP1900-0B
Detachable terminals
Attention
The detachable terminals are mechanically coded and only fit in a particular
position!
SIMOCODE pro
11-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
11.2 Mounting
11.2.1 Mounting the basic units and expansion modules
You can attach these system components in the following manner:

• Snap-on mounting onto a 35 mm standard mounting rail without requiring
tools
• Snap-on mounting of the basic units onto 45 mm and 55 mm wide current
measurement modules (up to 100 A) with an integrated standard mounting
rail, without requiring tools
• Screw attachment with mounting lugs (order no: 3RP1903) and screws on a
level surface.
These mounting lugs are only suitable for basic units and expansion modules!
Snap-on mounting onto standard mounting rails

SIMOCODE pro C SIMOCODE pro V Expansion module
with increased mounting depth
BU1 BU2
Snap-on mounting onto the current measurement module

e.g. 45 mm wide current measurement module with BU1
Standard
mounting
rails
Screw attachment
3RP1903 3RP1903
Ø 5 mm Ø 5 mm
Figure 11-1: Mounting the basic units
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 11-3
11.2.2 Mounting the current measurement modules
You can attach these system components in the following manner:

• Current measurement module up to 100 A: Standard mounting rail mounting
or screw attachment with mounting lugs (order no: 3RP1903-0B) and screws
on a level surface. These mounting lugs are only suitable for the current mea-
surement modules! For the current measurement modules up to 25 A you
also require an additional 25 mm long spacer.
• Current measurement module up to 200 A: Standard mounting rail mounting
or screw attachment.
• Current measurement modules up to 630 A screw attachment.
3UF7100-1AA00-00.3 A up to 3 A 3UF7102-1AA00-0
3UF7101-1AA00-0 2.4 A up to 25 A 10 A up to 100 A
Snap-on mounting
45 mm wide 55 mm wide
Screw attachment
3RP1900-0B 25 mm spacer 3RP1900-0B
3UF7103-1AA00-0 3UF7103-1BA00-0 3UF7104-1BA00-0

10 A up to 100 A 20 A up to 200 A 63 A up to 630 A
Snap-on mounting or Snap-on mounting or screw attachment
screw attachment screw attachment
Figure 11-2: Mounting the current measurement modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
11.2.3 Mounting the operator panel
The operator panel is designed to be installed in the front panel of motor

control centers or in cabinet doors (for example). Carry out the following
steps:
Step Description
1 Create a cutout, e.g. in the front panel or cabinet door (see diagram for
dimensions).
2 Place the operator panel in the cutout.
3 Snap the four mounting brackets onto the operator panel.
4 Lock the operator panel in position by tightly screwing the four screws of the
mounting bracket.
Table 11-1: Sequence for mounting an operator panel
Operator panel Mounting bracket

4x
Cutout
90+0.5
Front panel
30+0.5
Switching cabinet
door etc.
Figure 11-3: Mounting the operator panel
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 11-5
11.3 Wiring
11.3.1 Detachable terminals for basic units and expansion modules
Basic units and expansion modules have detachable terminals. You do not
have to detach the wiring to interchange the components!
Detachable terminals
Basic units Expansion modules
D D
C C
A A
A, C, D: coded
Figure 11-4: Detachable terminals
Attention
The detachable terminals are mechanically coded and only fit in a particular
position!
Cables
The cable cross-section is the same for all devices. The following table
shows the cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the
cables for the detachable terminals:
Detachable terminals Screwdriver Tightening torque
0.8 to 1.2 Nm
M3.5 7 to 10.3 LB.IN
Strip length Cable cross-section
10 Solid 1 x (0.5 to 4.0) mm²

2 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm²
10 Stranded, with/without 1 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm²

end sleeves 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm²
AWG AWG 2 x 20 to 14
Table 11-2: Cable cross-sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the cables
SIMOCODE pro
11-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Basic unit pin assignment

The following table shows the pin assignment of the detachable terminals:
Pin Assignment
Upper terminals
1 Relay output 1 and 2 1 OUT1 2 .2 3 4 IN3 IN45 T2
2 Relay output OUT1

6 OUT3 7 24 V 8 9 IN1 IN210 T1
3 Relay output OUT2
ϑ
4 Digital input IN3
5 Digital input IN4 SIMOCODE pro
T2 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)
6 Relay output OUT3 DEVICE

BUS
7 Relay output OUT4
GEN. FAULT
8 Internal 24 V DC
9 Digital input IN1
10 Digital input IN2 TEST/
PROFIBUS DP
RESET
T1 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)
Lower terminals
A1 Pin 1 supply voltage
A2 Pin 2 supply voltage
A PROFIBUS DP Pin A
B PROFIBUS DP Pin B A1 A2 A B SPE/PE
SPE/PE Shielded/PE
Table 11-3: Detachable terminals pin assignment
Sequence for wiring the detachable terminals of basic units

Step Description
1 Connect the cables to the upper and lower terminals.
2 If you want to use terminals A/B for PROFIBUS DP, place the PROFIBUS DP
cable-shielding on the SPE/PE terminal.
Attention! The A/B terminals are an alternative to the 9-pole SUB-D con-
nection! Baud rates up to 1.5 MBit/s are possible!
3 Connect the system shielding to the SPE/PE terminal.
Table 11-4: Wiring the detachable terminals of basic units
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 11-7
Digital module pin assignment

The following table shows the pin assignment of the detachable terminals:
Pin Assignment
Upper terminals
20 Relay output 1 and 2 20 OUT121 .2 22
21 Relay output OUT1

23 IN1 IN224 25
22 Relay output OUT2
23 Digital input IN1
25 —
Lower terminals
PE Shielding
READY
26 IN3 IN427 PE
Table 11-5: Detachable terminals pin assignment
Sequence for wiring the detachable terminals

Step Description
1 Connect the cables to the upper and lower terminals.
2 Connect the system shielding to the PE terminal.
Table 11-6: Wiring the detachable terminals of digital modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
11.3.2 Current measurement with current measurement modules
The size of the motor current determines the size of the corresponding cur-
rent measurement module that should be chosen for current measurement:
• Push-through system up to 200 A. The 3 phases pass through the push-
through openings.
• Rail connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection to Sie-
mens contactors.
The following table shows the various current measurement modules with
the corresponding current measurement ranges:
Current measurement module Current

measurement
3UF7100-1AA00-0
0.3 A up to 3 A Push-through system
Ø Push-through openings: 7.5 mm
3UF7101-1AA00-0
2.4 A up to 25 A
Ø Push-through openings: 7.5 mm
3UF7102-1AA00-0
Ø
10 A up to 100 A
Ø Push-through openings: 14 mm
3UF7103-1AA00-0
20 A up to 200 A
Ø Push-through openings: 25 mm
3UF7103-1BA00-0
20 A up to 200 A Rail connection
Pin cross-section: system
16 to 95 mm², AWG 6 to 3/0
3UF7104-1BA00-0
63 A up to 630 A
Pin cross-section:
50 to 240 mm²,
AWG 1/0 to 500 kcmil
Table 11-7: Current measurement module with the corresponding current measurement range
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 11-9
11.4 System interfaces

11.4.1 General
Please observe the following notes:

• SIMOCODE pro system components are connected to each other via the
system interfaces.
• There are 4 lengths of connecting cable that can be used to join the system
components.
• The system is always expanded from the basic unit. Basic units have 2
system interfaces:
– Bottom: For outgoing connection cables from BU1 to the current mea-
surement module.
– Front: For outgoing connecting cables to an expansion module or opera-
tor panel and for PC cables, memory modules or addressing plugs.
• Current measurement modules have one system interface:
– Bottom or front incoming connecting cable from basic unit.
• Expansion modules have 2 interfaces on the front.
– Left: For incoming connecting cable from previous expansion module or
basic unit BU2.
– Right: For outgoing connecting cables to an expansion module or opera-
tor panel and for PC cables, memory modules or addressing plugs.
• The operator panel has 2 system interfaces:
– Front: For PC cables, memory modules and addressing plugs.
– Rear side: For incoming connecting cable from previous expansion
module or basic unit.
• System interfaces that are not used are closed using the covering.
SIMOCODE pro
11-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Example
The following figure shows the configuration with SIMOCODE pro V:
Basic units Expansion modules
Incoming, from
• Expansion module
Outgoing, to • Basic unit BU2
• Current measurement module
Outgoing, to Outgoing, to
• Expansion module • Expansion module
• Operator panel • Operator panel
Current measurement Incoming, from Operator panel (OP)
Module (IM) • Previous expansion module
• Basic unit
Incoming, from
UF-01130
• Basic unit
SIMOCODE pro V Basic unit (BU2)

Current measurement
module (IM) Expansion module
Operator panel (OP)

UF-01130
Covering
Figure 11-5: Example of system interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 11-11
11.4.2 Basic units, expansion modules and current measurement modules
The system interfaces are located on the front and bottom of the basic
units.
Other system components can be
• joined to them using a connecting cable, e.g. digital module, current measu-
rement module
• directly plugged into them, e.g. addressing plugs and memory modules.
System interfaces that are not used are closed using the system-interface
covering.
Attention
Only connect system interfaces when there is no voltage applied!
Basic units Expansion modules Current measurement modules
System 2 system
interfaces interfaces
Connecting cable
Connecting cable System
interface
Memory module,
covering,
addressing plug
System
interface
Figure 11-6: Connecting system components to the system interface
SIMOCODE pro
11-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Sequence for connecting the system interface

Step Description
1 Place the plug in the plug shaft as straightly as possible. Ensure that the cat-
ches on the plug shaft above the plug housing audibly click into place.
For SIMOCODE pro C, the system interface on the bottom can only be
used for the current measurement module!
2 Use the covering to close system interfaces that are not in use
Table 11-8: Connecting the system interfaces
Example: SIMOCODE pro C
Catches Color-coded
1 3
System interfaces on the

front side and the bottom Catches
Connecting
Covering cable
Figure 11-7: Method for connecting the system interfaces
Notes
Attention
For SIMOCODE pro C, the system interfaces on the bottom can only be
used for the current measurement module!
Attention
Follow the color-coding on the connecting cable (see Figure)!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 11-13
11.4.3 Operator panel
The operator panel has two system interfaces:

• system interface on the rear. This is not normally accessible when an integra-
ted operator panel is used since the connecting cable from the basic unit or
expansion module is attached to it.
• system interface on the front. This is normally accessible when an integrated
operator panel is used. Components are connected directly when required
and then removed again afterwards.
These could include:
– Memory modules
– Addressing plugs
– PC cable to connect a PC / programming device
– Covering (if a system interface is not being used).
Rear system interface Front system interface
e.g.
Connecting cable
Memory module
Figure 11-8: Connecting system components to the operator panel
SIMOCODE pro
11-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Sequence for connecting the system interfaces

Step Description
1 Place the plug in the plug shaft as straightly as possible. Ensure that the cat-
ches on the plug shaft above the plug housing audibly click into place.
The incoming connecting cable is connected to the rear side.
2 Use the covering to close system interfaces that are not in use.
Table 11-9: Connecting the system interface
Rear system interface Front system interface
Catches Connecting
1
1
2
Catches
Color-coded
Connecting cable
Figure 11-9: Method for connecting the system interfaces
Notes
Attention
Follow the color-coding on the connecting cable (see figure)!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 11-15
11.4.4 PROFIBUS DP on a 9-pole SUB-D socket
The PROFIBUS DP can only be connected to the basic unit.
Attention
The 9-pole SUB-D connection is an alternative to terminals A/B!
Sequence for PROFIBUS DP connection

Step Description
1 Connect the PROFIBUS DP cable with the 9-pole SUB-D plug to the
PROFIBUS DP interface.
Table 11-10: Wiring the detachable terminals of digital modules
Example: SIMOCODE pro C
9-pole
SUB-D plug
PROFIBUS DP interface
9-pole SUB-D socket
PROFIBUS DP cable
Figure 11-10: Connecting the PROFIBUS DP to the 9-pole SUB-D socket
SIMOCODE pro
11-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
11.5 Installation guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP

Specification
The key data included in this chapter is valid for Siemens products and
cables.
Profibus user organization (PUO) installation guidelines

For electrical PROFIBUS networks, please also follow the PROFIBUS DMP/
FMS installation guidelines from the PROFIBUS user organization. This con-
tains important information about the cable arrangement and commission-
ing of PROFIBUS networks.
Publisher:
PROFIBUS User Organization e. V.
Haid-und-Neu-Straße 7
76131 Karlsruhe, Germany
Tel.: ++721 / 9658 590

Fax: ++721 / 9658 589
Internet: http://www.profibus.com
Guidelines, order no. 2.111
Installation of bus termination modules

The 3UF1900-1K.00 bus termination module is primarily designed for use in
MCC motor feeders. It provides a proper bus termination even for removed
MCC plug-in units. The bus termination module can also be utilized when no
(SUB-D) standard plug can be used in the last device on a bus line.
The 3UF1900-1KA00 bus termination module can also be connected to 220/
230 V, 380/400 V, 115/120 V or 24 V AC. The 3UF1900-1KB00 version can
also be used for 24 V DC.
Figure 11-11: Bus termination module
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 11-17
SIMOCODE pro
11-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Commissioning and Servicing 12
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find e.g. information on how SIMOCODE pro is com-
missioned, how components are replaced and how statistics are read.
Target groups
• commissioners
• technicians
• maintenance and service personnel.
Necessary knowledge
• general basic knowledge about SIMOCODE pro e.g. from chapter 1
• SIMOCODE ES software
• configuring the PROFIBUS DP address.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 12-1
Commissioning and Servicing
12.1 General information about commissioning and

servicing
Notes
Warning
Dangerous electrical voltage! Can cause electrical shock and
burns. Disconnect the device from the system before beginning work.
Attention
Follow the information contained in the operating manual.
Conditions
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled for commissioning and ser-
vicing:
• SIMOCODE pro is already mounted and wired
• the motor is switched off
Notes on parameterizing
You can parameterize SIMOCODE pro as follows:
• with the memory module - where parameters from a basic unit were already
saved: the memory module is plugged into the system interface. If the
memory module is on the system interface and the supply voltage returns to
the basic unit, then the basic unit is automatically parameterized by the
memory module. The parameters can also be loaded into the basic unit by
pressing the test/reset button.
• with the SIMOCODE ES software via the serial interface:
The PC/programming device is connected to the system interface with the
PC cable.
• with an automation system and/or SIMOCODE ES software via
PROFIBUS DP: For this, the PROFIBUS DP cable is connected to the
PROFIBUS DP interface of the basic unit.
Possible cases for commissioning

There are 2 possible cases for commissioning:
1. Standard case: SIMOCODE pro was not yet parameterized and has the basic
factory default settings:
When connected to PROFIBUS DP, the “bus” LED flashes green if a DP
master is connected.
2. SIMOCODE pro was already parameterized:
– the parameters were already loaded into the basic unit in advance.
– the parameters from a previous application are still present. Check if the
parameters e.g. set current are correct for the new application. Change
these correspondingly, if necessary.
SIMOCODE pro
12-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
12.2 Commissioning
12.2.1 Sequence of steps
Note the information in the previous chapter "General information about

commissioning and servicing" on page 12-2.
Carry out the following steps to commission SIMOCODE pro:
Step Description
1 Switch on the supply voltage. In an error-free state, the following LEDS should
light up or flash green:
• “Device” (light up green)
• “Bus” if PROFIBUS DP is connected. (light up/flash)
Continue with step 2.
Otherwise, carry out diagnostics according to the LED display. You will find
further information in chapter "Diagnostics via LED display" on page 12-5. Try
to rectify the error.
2 If you want to make SIMOCODE pro available on the PROFIBUS DP, set the
PROFIBUS DP address. You will find further information on this in chapter
"Setting the PROFIBUS DP address" on page 12-4.
3 Parameterize SIMOCODE pro or check the current parameterization e.g. with

a PC with the SIMOCODE ES software installed.
For this, connect the PC/programming device to the system interface with the
PC cable.
Attention! For basic unit 1, (SIMOCODE pro C) only use the system inter-
face on the front!
Table 12-1: Commissioning the basic unit
Schematic
PC cable,
Order number 3UF7940-0AA00-0
Figure 12-1: Schematic for commissioning the basic unit
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 12-3
12.2.2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address
First you have to set the PROFIBUS DP address of the basic unit. For this,
there are the following options:
• with the addressing plug
• with SIMOCODE ES
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with the addressing plug

Step Description
1 Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch.

The switches are numbered.
Example address 21: Put the “16”+“4”+“1” switches into the “ON position”.
2 Plug the addressing plug into the system interface. The “Device” LED lights
up yellow.
3 Press the test/reset button for a short period of time. The set address is
accepted. The “Device” LED flashes yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
4 Pull the addressing plug out of the system interface.
Table 12-2: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with the addressing plug
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with SIMOCODE ES

Step Description

3 Click on the menu Switchgear >Open online.
4 Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface.
Press OK to confirm.
5 Open the dialog Device parameters >Bus parameters.
6 Select the DP address.
7 Save the data in the basic unit with
Target system > Load in switchgear. The address is set.
Table 12-3: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with SIMOCODE ES
SIMOCODE pro
12-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
12.2.3 Diagnostics via LED display
The basic units and the operating panel have 3 LEDs which display certain
device states:
LED Status Display Description Corrective measures for

errors
Device Device Green Device ready for use —

status
Green Internal error Send back the basic unit
flickering
Yellow Memory module or —
addressing plug recogni-
zed, test/reset buttons
control the memory
module or addressing
plug
Yellow Memory module/ —
flashing addressing plug read in;
basic factory default set-
tings configured (dura-
tion: 3 s)
Yellow Memory module pro- —
flickering grammed
(duration: 3 s)
Red Faulty parameterization Parameterize anew and
switch the control
voltage off and on again
Basic unit defective (also Replace the
gen. fault on) basic unit!
Red Memory module, Reprogram/replace the
flashing addressing plug memory module, replace
Expansion module defec- the expansion module
tive (also gen. fault on -
flashing)
Off supply voltage too low Check if the supply
voltage is connected/tur-
ned on
Bus Bus sta- Off Bus not connected or Connect the bus or
tus bus error check the bus parame-
ters
Green Baud rate recognized/ —
flashing communication with PC/
programming device
Green Communication with —
PLC/DCS
Gen. Error Red Error present; reset is Rectify error, e.g. over-
Fault status saved load
Red Error present; no reset Rectify error, e.g. over-
flashing saved load
Off no error —
Table 12-4: Diagnostics via LED display
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 12-5
12.3 Servicing
12.3.1 Preventive maintenance
Preventive maintenance is an important step in avoiding faults and unfore-

seen costs. Industrial plants require regular professional maintenance in
order to e.g. prevent halts in production due to plant downtimes. Preventive
maintenance ensures that all components always work properly.
Reading out the statistics data

SIMOCODE pro makes statistics data available, which you e.g. can read out
with SIMOCODE ES under Target system > Service data/statistics data.
For example, by specifying “Motor operating hours” and “Number of
starts” you can decide whether motor and/or motor contactors should be
replaced.
Figure 12-2: Reading out statistic data
SIMOCODE pro
12-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
12.3.2 Saving the parameters
Always save the parameters in the memory module or in a

SIMOCODE ES file. This applies especially if you replace a basic unit or if
you want to transfer data from one basic unit to another.
Saving parameters from the basic unit in the memory module

Step Description
1 Plug the PC memory module into the system interface. The “Device” LED
lights up yellow for approx. 10 seconds. During this time, press the “Test/
reset” button for approx. 3 seconds. The parameters are saved in the memory
module. After a successful data transfer, the “Device” LED flickers yellow for
approx. 3 seconds.
2 If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.
Table 12-5: Saving the parameters in the memory module.
Saving parameters from the basic unit in a SIMOCODE ES file

Step Description

3 Open the menu Target system > Load into PC. The parameters are loaded
into the main memory from the basic unit.
4 Click on the menu Switchgear >Save copy as .... The parameters from the
main memory are saved in a SIMOCODE ES file.
Table 12-6: Saving parameters in a SIMOCODE ES file
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 12-7
Saving parameters from the memory module in the basic unit

Step Description
1 Plug the memory module into the system interface. The “Device” LED lights
up yellow for approx. 10 seconds. During this time, press the “test/reset” but-
ton for a short period of time. The parameters are saved in the basic unit. After
a successful data transfer, the “Device” LED lights up yellow for approx. 3
seconds.
2 If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.
Table 12-7: Saving parameters from the memory module in the basic unit
Attention
When the memory module is plugged in, the parameters are transferred
from the memory module to the basic unit.
Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file to a basic unit

Step Description

3 Click on the menu Switchgear>Open. The parameters from the
SIMOCODE ES file are saved in the main memory.
4 Click on the menu Target system > Load into switchgear. The parameters
are loaded from the main memory into the basic unit.
Table 12-8: Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file to a basic unit
SIMOCODE pro
12-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
12.3.3 Replace SIMOCODE pro components
Replacing a basic unit

Step Description
1 Save the parameters. You will find more information on this in chapter "Saving
the parameters" on page 12-7.
2 Switch off the main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic
unit.
3 If necessary, pull out the PC cable, the cover or the connecting cable from the
system interface.
4 Remove the detachable terminals. You do not need to remove the wiring.
5 Demount the basic unit.
6 Remove the detachable terminals of the new basic unit.
7 Mount the new basic unit.
8 Plug in the wired detachable terminals.
9 Plug the connecting cable into the system interface.
10 Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.
11 Save the parameters in the basic unit. You will find more information on this in
chapter "Saving the parameters" on page 12-7.
12 Switch on the main power for the feeder.
Table 12-9: Replacing a basic unit
Replacing expansion units

Step Description
1 Switch off the main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic
unit.
2 If necessary, pull out the PC cable, the cover or the connecting cable from the
system interface.
3 Remove the detachable terminals. You do not need to remove the wiring.
4 Demount the expansion module.
5 Remove the detachable terminals of the new expansion unit.
6 Mount the new expansion module.
7 Plug in the wired detachable terminals.
8 Plug the connecting cable into the system interface.
9 Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.
10 Switch on the main power for the feeder.
Table 12-10: Replacing a basic unit
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 12-9
12.3.4 Configuring the basic factory default setting
With the basic factory default settings, all parameters are reset to the fac-
tory values.
Configuring the basic factory default settings with the test/reset button on the basic
device
Step Description
1 Switch off the supply voltage for the basic unit.

2 Press the test/reset button on the basic unit and keep it pressed.
3 Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit. The “Device” LED lights up
yellow.
4 Release the test/reset button after approx. two seconds.
5 Press the test/reset button again after approx. two seconds.
6 Release the test/reset button after approx. two seconds.
7 Press the test/reset button again after approx. two seconds.
9 Basic factory default setting is configured.
Table 12-11: Configuring basic factory default settings with the test/reset button on the basic device
Notes
Attention
If one of the steps is not carried out correctly, the basic unit reverts to nor-
mal operation.
Attention
This function is always active, independent of the “test/reset buttons lok-
ked” parameter.
Configuring the basic factory default settings with the SIMOCODE ES software
Prerequisite: SIMOCODE pro is connected via PROFIBUS DP or via the
system interface with PC/programming device and started with
SIMOCODE ES.
Step Description
1 Click on the menu Switchgear >Open online.

2 In the menu, select Target system > Command > Basic factory setting.
3 Press “Yes” to confirm.
4 Basic factory default settings are configured.
Table 12-12: Configuring the basic factory setting with the SIMOCODE ES software
SIMOCODE pro
12-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Tables A
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find various tables which can help you when working
with SIMOCODE pro.
Target groups
• configurators.
Necessary knowledge
• good knowledge of SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 A-1
A-2
A.1
Lamp control
Tables
QLE<< QLE< QLA QLE> QLE>>

Specification/ Control station Contactor control
(ON<<) (ON<) (OFF) (ON>) (ON>>)
Control function
Status signal
ON<< ON< OFF ON> ON>> QE1 QE2 QE3 QE4 QE5 ON<< ON< OFF ON> ON>>
Overload 1),2) - - - - - - - Active - - - - - - -
Direct starter 1),2) - - OFF ON - ON - - - - - OFF ON -
Reversing starter 1),2) - Left OFF Right - Right Left - - - Left OFF Right -
Circuit breaker 1),2) - - OFF ON - ON OFF - - - - - OFF ON -
pulse pulse
Star-delta - - OFF ON - Star Delta Network - - - - OFF ON -
starter 2) contactor contactor contactor
Star-delta starter Left OFF Right - Star Delta Right Left - Left OFF Right -
with reversal of the direction contactor contactor network network
control functions
of rotation 2) contactor contactor
Dahlander 2) - - OFF Slow Fast Fast Slow Fast - - - - OFF Slow Fast
Star
contactor
Dahlander Left Left OFF Right Right Right Right Fast Left Left Left Left OFF Right Right
with reversal of the direction Fast Slow Slow Fast Fast Slow Star Slow Fast Fast Slow Slow Fast
of rotation 2) contactor
Pole-changing switch 2) - - OFF Slow Fast Fast Slow - - - - - OFF Slow Fast
Pole-changing switch Left Left OFF Right Right Right Right - Left Left Left Left OFF Right Right
with reversal of the direction Fast Slow Slow Fast Fast Slow Slow Fast Fast Slow Slow Fast
of rotation 2)
Valve 2) - - Closed Open - Open - - - - - - Closed Open -
Soft starter 2) - - OFF ON - ON - Reset ON - - - OFF ON -
network command
contactor
Soft reversing starter2) - Left OFF Right - Right Left Reset ON - - Left OFF Right -
network network command
contactor contactor
status signals/messages for the control functions
Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and
1) Basic unit 1, SIMOCODE pro C
Table A-1: Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and status signals/messages for the
2) Basic unit 2, SIMOCODE pro V
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

SIMOCODE pro
Tables
A.2 Abbreviations and Specifications

Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in the tables:
Abbreviation Meaning Note
BU1 Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C)
BU2 Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro V)
IM Current measurement module
UM Current/voltage measurement modu- Available from mid 2005

les
DM1 Digital module 1
OP Operator panel
AM Analog module Available from mid 2005
EM Earth-fault module Available from mid 2005
TM Temperature module Available from mid 2005
Th Thermistor
CF Control function
Cycl. Cyclic
Acycl. Acyclic
Table A-2: Abbreviations
Specifications
The following specifications apply in the tables:
Example
Specification Type Range Unit Info

Reserved Byte[4]
Cos φ Byte 0 .. 100 1% BU2
Reserved Byte[5]
Max. current I max Word 0 .. 65535 1% / Ie BU1
BU2
Grayed entries only available Entries in italics Entry relevant for basic
from the middle of 2005 not relevant (reserved) unit 1 and basic unit 2
and, when writing,
should be filled with “0”
SIMOCODE III
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 A-3
Tables
A.3 Socket assignment table - digital

This table contains all assignment numbers (Nr.) of the sockets (digital). You
only need these assignment numbers if, in a user program, you fill data
records and write these back (for example).
Nr. Specification Specification Information

0 Static level Not connected BU1/BU2
1 Fixed level value‚ 0 BU1/BU2
2 Fixed level value‚ 1 BU1/BU2
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Basic unit BU BU - test/reset button BU1/BU2
9 BU - input 1 BU1/BU2
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
16 Digital expansion modules DM DM1 - input 1 DM1
17 DM1 - input 2 DM1
24 Reserved
25 Reserved
26 Reserved
27 Reserved
28 Reserved
29 Reserved
30 Reserved
31 Reserved
32 Operator panel OP OP - test/reset button OP
33 OP - button 1 OP
34 OP - button 2 OP
35 OP - button 3 OP
36 OP - button 4 OP
37 Reserved
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital
SIMOCODE pro
A-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Tables

38 Reserved
39 Reserved
40 DPV1/RS-232 interface Acyclic control data - bit 0.0 BU1/BU2
41 (Acyclic data) Acyclic control data - bit 0.1 BU1/BU2
42 Acyclic control data - bit 0.2 BU1/BU2
56 PLC/DCS interface PLC [DPV0] Cyclic control data - bit 0.0 BU1/BU2
57 (cyclic data) Cyclic control data - bit 0.1 BU1/BU2
58 Cyclic control data - bit 0.2 BU1/BU2
72 Enabled control command Enabled control command ON<<
73 Enabled control command ON<
74 Enabled control command OFF
75 Enabled control command ON>
76 Enabled control command ON>>
77 Reserved
78 Reserved
79 Reserved
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital (cont.)
SIMOCODE III
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 A-5
Tables

80 Contactor controls Contactor control 1 QE1
81 Contactor control 2 QE2
dependent of the
control function
85 Reserved
86 Reserved
87 Reserved
88 Lamp controls Display - QLE<< (ON<<)
89 Display - QLE< (ON<)
dependent of the
90 Display - QLA (OFF)
control function
91 Display - QLE> (ON>)
92 Display - QLE>> (ON>>)
93 Display - QLS (fault) BU1/BU2
94 Reserved
95 Reserved
96 Status signals - general Status - general fault BU1/BU2
97 Status - general warning BU1/BU2
98 Status - device BU1/BU2
99 Status - bus BU1/BU2
100 Status - PLC/DCS BU1/BU2
101 Status - current flows Current measure-
ment
102 Reserved
103 Reserved
104 Status signals - controlling Status - ON<<
105 Status - ON<
dependent of the
106 Status - OFF
control function
107 Status - ON>
108 Status - ON>>
109 Status - start active BU1/BU2
110 Status - interlocking time active all reversing star-
ters and sliders
111 Status - switching interval active Star-delta, Dahlan-
der, pole-changing
switches
112 Status - runs in open direction
113 Status - runs in closed direction
114 Status - FC dependent of the
115 Status - FO control function
116 Status - TC
117 Status - TO
118 Status - cold starting (TPF) BU1/BU2
119 Status - OPO BU2
SIMOCODE pro
A-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Tables

120 Status - automatic mode of ope- BU1/BU2
ration
121 Status signals - protection Status - emergency start execu- Current measure-
ted ment
122 Status - cooling down time active Current measure-
ment
123 Status - pause time active Current measure-
ment
124 Status signals - miscellaneous Status - device test active BU1/BU2
125 Status - phase sequence 1-2-3 UM
126 Status - phase sequence 3-2-1 UM
127 Reserved
128 Signals - protection Signal - overload operation Current measure-
ment
129 Signal - asymmetry Current measure-
ment
130 Signal - overload Current measure-
ment
131 Signal - overload + phase failure Current measure-
ment
132 Signal - internal earth fault Current measure-
ment
133 Signal - external earth fault EM
134 Reserved
135 Signal - thermistor overload Th
136 Signal - thermistor short circuit Th
137 Signal - thermistor wire break Th
138 Signal - TM warning T> TM
139 Signal - TM tripping T> TM
140 Signal - TM sensor error TM
141 Signal - TM out of range TM
142 Reserved
143 Reserved
144 Signals - level monitoring Signal - warning I> Current measure-
ment
145 Signal - warning I< Current measure-
ment
146 Signal - warning P> UM
147 Signal - warning P< UM
148 Signal - warning cosφ< UM
149 Signal - warning U< UM
150 Signal - warning 0/4-20 mA> AM
151 Signal - warning 0/4-20 mA< AM
152 Signal - tripping I> Current measure-
ment
153 Signal - tripping I< Current measure-
ment
SIMOCODE III
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 A-7
Tables

154 Signal - tripping P> UM
155 Signal - tripping P< UM
156 Signal - tripping cosφ< UM
157 Signal - tripping U< UM
158 Signal - tripping 0/4-20 mA> AM
159 Signal - tripping 0/4-20 mA< AM
160 Signal - blocking Current measure-
ment
161 Reserved
162 Reserved
163 Signal - no start permitted BU1/BU2
164 Signal - number of starts > BU1/BU2
165 Signal - another start permitted BU1/BU2
166 Signal - motor operating hours > BU1/BU2
167 Signal - stopped time > BU1/BU2
168 Signal - limit value 1 BU2
172 Signals - miscellaneous Signal - external fault 1 BU1/BU2
173 Signal - external fault 2 BU1/BU2
176 Signal - external fault 5 BU2
177 Signal - external fault 6 BU2
178 Reserved
179 Reserved
180 Signal - analog module wire AM
break
181 Reserved
182 Reserved
183 Reserved
184 Signals - timestamp function Signal - timestamp function BU2
active+ok
185 Reserved
186 Reserved
187 Reserved
188 Signals - system interface Signal - configured operator BU1/BU2
panel is missing
189 Reserved
190 Reserved
191 Reserved
192 Faults - general Fault - HW fault basic unit BU1/BU2
193 Fault - module fault BU1/BU2
SIMOCODE pro
A-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Tables

194 Fault - temp components BU1/BU2
195 Fault - configuration fault BU1/BU2
196 Fault - parameterization BU1/BU2
197 Fault - bus BU1/BU2
198 Fault - PLC/DCS BU1/BU2
199 Reserved
200 Faults - controlling Fault - runtime ON
201 Fault - runtime OFF not for overload
202 Fault - F ON relay
203 Fault - F OFF
204 Fault - blocking slider Silder
205 Fault - double 0 Valve/silder
206 Fault - double 1 Valve/silder
207 Fault - end position Valve/silder
208 Fault - antivalence Slider
209 Fault - cold starting (TPF) error BU1/BU2
210 Fault - UVO error BU2
211 Fault - OPO error BU2
212 Reserved
213 Reserved
214 Reserved
215 Reserved
216 Freely programmable elements Truth table 1 3I/1O output BU1/BU2
217 Truth table 2 3I/1O output BU1/BU2
218 Truth table 3 3I/1O output BU1/BU2
219 Truth table 4 3I/1O output BU2
224 Truth table 9 5I/2O output 1 BU2
225 Truth table 9 5I/2O output 2 BU2
226 Reserved
227 Reserved
228 Reserved
229 Reserved
230 Reserved
231 Reserved
232 Timer 1 output BU1/BU2
233 Timer 2 output BU1/BU2
234 Timer 3 output BU2
235 Timer 4 output BU2
236 Counter 1 output BU1/BU2
237 Counter 2 output BU1/BU2
SIMOCODE III
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 A-9
Tables

238 Counter 3 output BU2
239 Counter 4 output BU2
240 Signal conditioning 1 output BU1/BU2
241 Signal conditioning 2 output BU1/BU2
242 Signal conditioning 3 output BU2
243 Signal conditioning 4 output BU2
244 Non-volatile element 1 output BU1/BU2
245 Non-volatile element 2 output BU1/BU2
246 Non-volatile element 3 output BU2
247 Non-volatile element 4 output BU2
248 Flashing 1 output BU1/BU2
251 Flickering 1 output BU1/BU2
254 Reserved
255 Reserved
SIMOCODE pro
A-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Tables
A.4 Socket assignment table - analog

This table contains all assignment numbers (Nr.) of the sockets (analog). You
only need these assignment numbers if, in a user program, you fill data
records and write these back (for example).
All inputs for analog data can only process values of type “word” (2 bytes).
In order to be also able to process values of type “byte”, the following app-
lies:
• the byte value is processed as a low byte, the high byte is always 0
Nr. Specification Unit Information

0 Not connected BU1/BU2
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Timer 1 - actual value 100 ms BU1/BU2
5 Timer 2 - actual value 100 ms BU1/BU2
6 Timer 3 - actual value 100 ms BU2
7 Timer 4 - actual value 100 ms BU2
8 Timer 1 - actual value BU1/BU2
9 Timer 2 - actual value BU1/BU2
10 Timer 3 - actual value BU2
11 Timer 4 - actual value BU2
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
16 Max. current I_max 1%/Ie Current measurement
17 Current I_L1 1%/Ie Current measurement
20 Phase asymmetry 1% Current measurement
21 Reserved
22 Reserved
23 Reserved
24 Voltage U_L1 1V UM
27 Cos phi 1% UM
28 Reserved
29 Reserved
30 Reserved
31 Reserved
32 Heating up of the motor model Current measurement
33 Time to trip 100 ms Current measurement
Table A-4: Socket assignment table - analog
SIMOCODE III
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 A-11
Tables
Nr. Specification Unit Information

34 Recovery time 100 ms Current measurement
35 Last tripping current 1%/Ie Current measurement
36 TM - Temperature 1K TM
37 TM - Temperature 1 1K TM
40 Permitted starts - actual value BU1/BU2
41 Stopped time 1h BU1/BU2
42 Reserved
43 Reserved
44 AM - input See 1) AM
45 TM - temperature 1K TM
46 Reserved
47 Reserved
48 Acyclic control data - analog value BU1/BU2
49 Cyclic control data - analog value BU1 BU2
50 Reserved
51 Reserved
52 Motor operating hours - H-word BU1 BU2
53 Motor operating hours - L-word 1s BU1 BU2
54 Int. motor operating hours - H-word BU1 BU2
55 Int. motor operating hours - L-word 1s BU1 BU2
56 Device operating hours - H-word BU1 BU2
57 Device operating hours - L-word 1s BU1 BU2
58 Number of starts - H-word BU1 BU2
59 Number of starts - L-word BU1 BU2
60 Int. number of starts right - H-word BU1 BU2
61 Int. number of starts right - L-word BU1 BU2
62 Int. number of starts left - H-word BU1 BU2
63 Int. number of starts left - L-word BU1 BU2
64 Reserved
.. Reserved
69 Reserved
70 Real power - H-word BU2
71 Real power - L-word 1W BU2
72 Apparent power - H-word BU2
73 Apparent power - L-word 1VA BU2
75 Reserved
.. Reserved
255 Reserved
Table A-4: Socket assignment table - analog (cont.)
1) S7 format: 0/4mA=0
20mA=27648
SIMOCODE pro
A-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Tables
A.5 Detailled signals of the slave diagnosis

This table contains the detailled signals of the slave diagnosis for the status
signals and the prozess alarm. This information is also contained in the data
record 92.
Byte.Bit Status signal Info

1.0 Faults controlling Fault - Ausführung Ein-Befehl
1.1 Fault - Ausführung Aus-Befehl
1.2 Fault - F Ein
1.3 Fault - F Aus
1.4 Fault - blocked slider slider
1.5 Fault - double 0 slider
1.6 Fault - double 1 slider
1.7 Fault - Endlage slider
2.0 Fault - antivalence slider
2.1 Fault - cold starting (TPF)-error BU1 BU2
2.2 Fault - UVO error BU2
2.3 Fault - UVO error BU2
2.4 reserved
3.0 Faults - protection reserved
3.1 Fault - asymmetriy Current measurement
3.2 Fault - overload Current measurement
3.3 Fault - overload + phase failure Current measurement
3.4 Fault - Int. earth fault Current measurement
3.5 Fault - Ext. earth fault EM
3.6 reserved
3.7 Fault - thermistor overload Th
4.0 Fault - thermistor short circuit Th
4.1 Fault - Thermistor wire break Th
4.2 reserved
4.3 Fault - TM Auslösung T> TM
4.4 Fault - TM Sensorfehler TM
4.5 Fault - TM Out of range TM
4.6 reserved
5.0 Faults - Fault - tripping I> Current measurement
5.1 level monitoring Fault - tripping I< Current measurement
5.2 Fault - tripping P> UM
5.3 Fault - trippingP< UM
5.4 Fault - tripping cosφ< UM
5.5 Fault - tripping U< UM
5.6 Fault - tripping 0/4-20mA> AM
5.7 Fault - tripping0/4-20mA< AM
6.0 Fault - blocking Current measurement
6.1 reserved
Table A-5: Detailed signals of the slave diagnosis
SIMOCODE III
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 A-13
Tables

6.4 Fault - number of starts> BU1 BU2
6.5 reserved
7.0 Faults - Fault - ext. fault 1 BU1 BU2
7.1 miscellaneous Fault - ext. fault 2 BU1 BU2
7.2 Fault - ext. fault 3 BU1 BU2
7.3 Fault - ext. fault 4 BU1 BU2
7.4 Fault - ext. fault 5 BU2
7.5 Fault - ext. fault 6 BU2
7.6 reserved
7.7 reserved
8.0 Fault - analogue module wire break AM
8.1 Fault - test shutdown BU1 BU2
8.2 reserved
9.0 Warnings - protection Warning - overload protection Current measurement
9.1 Warning - asymmetry Current measurement
9.2 Warning - overload Current measurement
9.3 Warning - overload+ phase failure Current measurement
9.4 Warning - internal earth fault Current measurement
9.5 Warning - external earth fault EM
9.6 reserved
9.7 Warning - thermistor overload Th
10.0 Warning - thermistor short circuit Th
10.1 Warning - thermistor wire break Th
10.2 Warning - TM warnung T> TM
10.3 reserved
10.4 Warning - TM sensor error TM
10.5 Warning - TM out of range TM
10.6 reserved
11.0 Warnings - Warning - warning I> Current measurement
11.1 level monitoring Warning - warning I< Current measurement
11.2 Warning - warning P> UM
11.3 Warning - warning P< UM
11.4 Warning - warning cosφ< UM
11.5 Warning - warning U< UM
11.6 Warning - warning 0/4-20mA> AM
11.7 Warning - Warning 0/4-20mA< AM
12.0 Warning - Blocking Current measurement
12.1 reserved
12.3 Warning - no start permitted BU1 BU2
12.4 Warning - number of starts > BU1 BU2
12.5 Warning - another start permitted BU1 BU2
12.6 Warning - motor operation hours > BU1 BU2
12.7 Warning - stopped time t > BU1 BU2
Table A-5: Detailed signals of the slave diagnosis (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
A-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Tables

13.0 Warnings - Warning - ext. fault 1 BU1 BU2
13.1 miscellaneous Warning - ext. fault 2 BU1 BU2
13.2 Warning - ext. fault 3 BU1 BU2
13.3 Warning - ext. fault 4 BU1 BU2
13.4 Warning - ext. fault 5 BU2
13.5 Warning - ext. fault 6 BU2
13.6 reserved
13.7 reserved
14.0 Warnung - analog module wire AM
break
14.1 reserved
15.0 reserved
15.1 Status signals - pro- Status - emergency start executed
15.2 tection Status - cooling down time active
15.3 reserved
15.4 reserved
15.5 reserved
15.6 Status signals - cont- Status - cold starting (TPF) BU1 BU2
rolling
15.7 reserved
16.0 Signals - Signal - start-up parameter block BU1 BU2
parameterization active
16.1 Signal - BU1 BU2
Parameter change not permitted in
the current operating state
16.2 Signal - device does not support the BU1 BU2
required functions
16.3 Signal - parameter faulty BU1 BU2
16.4 Signal - wrong password BU1 BU2
16.5 reserved
16.6 reserved
16.7 reserved
Table A-5: Detailed signals of the slave diagnosis (cont.)
SIMOCODE III
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 A-15
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
A-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Data Formats and Data Records
Data Formats and Data Records B

In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the data records of
SIMOCODE pro.
Target groups
• configurators
Necessary knowledge
• good knowledge about writing and reading data records
• good knowledge of SIMOCODE pro.
Data records - overview
Data record Description Read/write

number
67 Process image of the outputs Read

69 Process image of the inputs Read
92 Device diagnostics Read
(faults, warnings, signals)
94 Measured values Read
95 Service/statistics data Read/write
130 Base device parameter 1 (BU1 BU2) Read/write
131 Base device parameter 2 (BU1 BU2) Read/write
132 Extended device parameter 1 (BU2) Read/write
133 Extended device parameter 2 (BU2) Read/write
139 Labeling Read/write
160 Communication parameters Read/write
165 Designation Read/write
202 Acyclic control data Read/write
203 Acyclic signaling data Read
224 Password protection Write
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 B-1
B.1 Handling data records

This section contains helpful information about how best to handle data
records.
B.1.1 Writing/reading data records
Access to data records via slot and index

• Slot: access via slot 1
• Index: data record number
Writing/reading data records with STEP7
You can access the data records from the user program.
• Writing data records:
S7 DPV1 master: by calling SFB 53 “WR_REC” or SFC 58
S7 master: by calling SFC 58
• Reading data records:
S7 DPV1 master: by calling SFB 52 “RD_REC” or SFC 59
S7 master: by calling SFC 59
Further information
You will find further information on the SFBs
• in the “System software for S7-300/400, system and standard functions”
reference manual
• in the STEP7 online help.
Byte arrangements
When data which is longer than one byte is saved, then the bytes are arran-
ged as follows (“big endian”):
Byte arrangements Data type
Byte 0 High byte

High word
Byte 1 Low byte
Double word (D-word)
Byte 2 High byte
Low word
Byte 3 Low byte
Byte 0 High byte

Word
Byte 1 Low byte
Byte 0 Byte 0
Byte
Byte 1 Byte 1
Figure B-1: Byte arrangement in the “big endian” format
SIMOCODE pro
B-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
B.1.2 Abbreviations
The fallowing abbreviations are used in the tables:
Abbreviation Meaning Note
BU1 Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C)
BU2 Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro V)
IM Current measurement module
UM Current/voltage measurement modu- Available from mid 2005

les
OP Operator panel
AM Analog module Available from mid 2005
EM Earth-fault module Available from mid 2005
TM Temperature module Available from mid 2005
Th Thermistor
CF Control function
Cycl. Cyclic
Acycl. Acyclic
Table B-1: Abbreviations
B.1.3 Specifications
The following specifications apply in the tables:

Example
Specification Type Range Unit Info

Reserved Byte[4]
Cos φ Byte 0 .. 100 1% BU2
Reserved Byte[5]
max. current I max Word 0 .. 65535 1% / Ie BU1
BU2
Grayed entries only Entries in italics Entry is relevant for basic

available from mid 2005 are not relevant (reserved) unit 1 and basic unit 2
and, when writing,
should be filled with “0”
Settings are valid/can only be made when the corresponding system com-
ponents are used.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 B-3
B.2 Data record 67 - process image of the outputs
Byte.Bit Specification Presetting Type Info

(see also
parameter)
0.0 Cyclic controlling - bit 0.0 Control station - Bit
PLC/DCS [DP] ON<
PLC/DCS [DP] OFF
PLC/DCS [DP] ON>
0.3 Cyclic controlling - bit 0.3 Test 1 Bit
0.4 Cyclic controlling - bit 0.4 Motor protection - Bit
Emergency start
0.5 Cyclic controlling - bit 0.5 Mode selector S1 Bit
BU1
0.6 Cyclic controlling - bit 0.6 Reset 1 Bit BU2
0.7 Cyclic controlling - bit 0.7 Not assigned Bit
2.0 to Cyclic controlling - Not assigned Word BU2
3.7 analog value
Table B-2: Data record 67 - process image of the outputs
Base types (cyclic control data PLC --> SIMOCODE pro)

Base type 1 4 bytes of control Cyclic controlling -
(available from mid 2005) data bits 0.0 to 1.7 BU2
Cyclic controlling -
analog value
Base type 2 2 bytes of control Cyclic controlling - BU1
data bits 0.0 to 1.7 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
B-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
B.3 Data record 69 - process image of the inputs
Byte.Bit Specification Presetting Type Info

(see also
parameter)
0.0 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.0 Status - ON< Bit
0.1 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.1 Status - OFF Bit
0.2 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.2 Status - ON> Bit
0.3 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.3 Signal - Bit
overload operation
0.4 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.4 Status - Bit
interlocking time
active
automatic mode of
operation
BU1
0.6 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.6 Status - Bit BU2
general fault
general warning
1.0 Cyclic signaling - bit 1.0 Not assigned Bit
2.0 PLC/DCS analog input 1 Max. current I_max Word
4.0 PLC/DCS analog input 2 Not assigned Word BU2
Table B-3: Data record 69 - process image of the inputs
Base types (cyclic signaling data SIMOCODE pro --> PLC)

Base type 1 10 bytes of Cyclic signaling -
(available from mid 2005) signaling data bits 0.0 to 1.7 BU2
Cyclic signaling -
analog inputs 1 to 4
Base type 2 4 bytes of signaling Cyclic signaling -
data bits 0.0 to 1.7 BU1
BU2
Cyclic signaling -
analog input 1
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 B-5
B.4 Data record 92 - device diagnostics
Byte.Bit Specification Info DP

Diagn.*
0.0 Reserved
1.0 Status signals - Status - BU1 BU2
general general fault
1.1 Status - BU1 BU2
general warning
1.2 Status - device BU1 BU2
1.3 Status - bus BU1 BU2
1.4 Status - PLC/DCS BU1 BU2
1.5 Status - motor current flo- Current measu-
wing rement
1.6 Reserved
2.0 Status signals - Status - ON<<
controlling
2.1 Status - ON< Depending on
2.2 Status - OFF the CF
2.3 Status - ON>
2.4 Status - ON>>
2.5 Status - start active BU1 BU2
2.6 Status - all reversing star-
interlocking time active ters and sliders
2.7 Status - Star-delta, Dahl-
pause time active ander, pole-chan-
ging switches
3.0 Status - runs in open direc-
tion
3.1 Status - runs in closed
direction Depending on
3.2 Status - FC the CF
3.3 Status - FO
3.4 Status - TC
3.5 Status - TO
3.6 Status - BU1 BU2 M
cold starting (TPF)
3.7 Status - OPO BU2
4.0 Status - automatic mode BU1 BU2
of operation
4.1 Status signals - Status - emergency start Current measu- M
protection executed rement
4.2 Status - Current measu- M
cooling down time active rement
4.3 Status - pause time active Current measu-
rement
Table B-4: Data record 92 - diagnostics
SIMOCODE pro
B-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Diagn.*
4.4 Status signals - Status - BU1 BU2
miscellaneous device test active
4.5 Status - UM
phase sequence 1-2-3
4.6 Status - UM
phase sequence 3-2-1
4.7 Reserved
5.0 Signals - protec- Signal - Current measu-
tion overload operation rement
5.1 Signal - Current measu-
asymmetry rement
5.2 Signal - overload Current measu-
rement
5.3 Signal - overload + phase Current measu-
failure rement
internal earth fault rement
5.5 Signal - EM
external earth fault
5.6 Res. signal - EM
warning ext. EF
5.7 Signal - Th
thermistor overload
6.0 Signal - thermistor short Th
circuit
6.1 Signal - thermistor wire Th
break
6.2 Signal - TM warning T> TM
6.3 Signal - TM tripping T> TM
6.4 Signal - TM sensor error TM
6.5 Signal - TM TM
Out of range
6.6 Reserved Current measu-
rement
7.0 Signals - level Signal - warning I>
monitoring
7.1 Signal - warning I< Current measu-
rement
7.2 Signal - UM
warning P>
7.3 Signal - UM
warning P<
7.4 Signal - UM
warning cosφ<
7.5 Signal - UM
warning U<
7.6 Signal - AM
warning 0/4-20mA>
Table B-4: Data record 92 - diagnostics (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 B-7

Diagn.*
7.7 Signal - AM
warning 0/4-20 mA<
tripping I> rement
8.1 Signal -
tripping I<
8.2 Signal - UM
tripping P>
8.3 Signal - UM
tripping P<
8.4 Signal - UM
tripping cosφ<
8.5 Signal - UM
tripping U<
8.6 Signal - AM
tripping 0/4-20 mA>
8.7 Signal - AM
tripping 0/4-20 mA<
9.0 Signal - blocking Current measu-
rement
9.1 Reserved
9.3 Signal - not start permitted BU1 BU2
9.4 Signal - number of starts > BU1 BU2
another start permitted
9.6 Signal - motor operating BU1 BU2
hours >
stopped time >
10.0 Signal - limit value 1 BU2
10.4 Signals - miscella- Signal - external fault 1 BU1 BU2
neous
10.5 Signal - external fault 2 BU1 BU2
11.0 Signal - external fault 5 BU2
11.1 Signal - external fault 6 BU2
11.2 Reserved
11.3 Reserved
11.4 Signal - AM
analog module wire break
11.5 Reserved
SIMOCODE pro
B-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Diagn.*
12.0 Signals - Signal - timestamp func- BU2
timestamp function active+ok
tion
12.1 Reserved
12.4 Signals - Signals - configured opera- BU1 BU2
system interface tor panel is missing
12.5 Signal - module not sup- BU1 BU2
ported
12.6 Reserved
13.0 Signals - memory Signal - memory module BU1 BU2
module read in
13.1 Signal - memory module BU1 BU2
programmed
13.2 Signal - memory module BU1 BU2
deleted
13.3 Reserved
13.7 Signals - addres- Signal - addressing plug BU1 BU2
sing plug read in
14.0 Signals - parame- Signal - start-up parameter BU1 BU2 M
terization block active
14.1 Signal - BU1 BU2 M
parameter change not per-
mitted in the current ope-
rating state
device does not support
the required functions
parameter faulty
wrong password
password protection
active
basic factory default set-
tings
parameterization active
15.0 Signal - prm error number BU1 BU2
(bytes) **
16.0 Reserved
17.0 Warnings - pro- Warning - Current measu- W
tection overload operation rement
17.1 Warning - Current measu- W
asymmetry rement
17.2 Warning - overload Current measu- W
rement
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 B-9

Diagn.*
17.3 Warning - overload + Current measu- W
phase failure rement
17.5 Warning - EM W
17.6 Reserved
17.7 Warning - Th W
thermistor overload
18.0 Warning - thermistor short Th W
circuit
18.1 Warning - thermistor wire Th W
break
18.2 Warning - TM W
TM warning T>
18.3 Reserved
18.4 Warning - TM W
TM sensor error
18.5 Warning - TM W
TM out of range
18.6 Reserved
19.0 Warnings - Warning - Current measu- W
level monitoring Warning I> rement
Warning I< rement
19.2 Warning - UM W
Warning P>
19.3 Warning - UM W
Warning P<
19.4 Warning - UM W
warning cosφ<
19.5 Warning - UM W
Warning U<
19.6 Warning - AM W
warning 0/4-20 mA>
19.7 Warning - AM W
warning 0/4-20 mA<
blocking rement
20.1 Reserved
20.4 Warning - BU1 BU2 W
number of starts >
20.5 Warning - BU1 BU2 W
another start permitted
20.6 Warning - motor operating BU1 BU2 W
hours >
20.7 Signal - BU1 BU2 W
stopped time >
SIMOCODE pro
B-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Diagn.*
21.0 Warnings - mis- Warning - ext. fault 1 BU1 BU2 W
cellaneous
21.1 Warning - ext. fault 2 BU1 BU2 W
21.4 Warning - ext. fault 5 BU2 W
21.5 Warning - ext. fault 6 BU2 W
21.6 Reserved
21.7 Reserved
22.0 Warning - analog module BU2 W
wire break
22.1 Reserved
23.0 Faults - general Fault - HW fault basic unit BU1 BU2 F9
23.1 Fault - module fault BU1 BU2 F9
23.2 Fault - temp components BU1 BU2 F9
(e.g. memory module)
23.3 Fault - configuration fault BU1 BU2 F16
23.4 Fault - BU1 BU2 F16
parameterization
23.5 Fault - bus BU1 BU2
23.6 Fault - PLC/DCS BU1 BU2
23.7 Reserved
24.0 Faults - control- Fault - runtime ON Current measu- FAU
ling rement
24.1 Fault - Current measu- FAU
runtime OFF rement
24.2 Fault - F ON Current measu- FAU
rement
24.3 Fault - F OFF FAU
24.4 Fault - CF = slider FAU
blocked slider
24.5 Fault - double 0 CF = slider FAU
24.6 Fault - double 1 CF = slider FAU
24.7 Fault - end position CF = slider FAU
25.0 Fault - antivalence CF = slider FAU
25.1 Fault - cold starting (TPF) BU1 BU2 FAU
error
25.2 Fault - UVO error BU2 FAU
25.3 Fault - OPO error BU2 FAU
25.4 Reserved
26.0 Reserved
26.1 Faults - protec- Fault - asymmetry Current measu- FAU
tion rement
26.2 Fault - overload Current measu- FAU
rement
26.3 Fault - overload + phase Current measu- FAU
failure rement
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 B-11

Diagn.*
26.4 Fault - Current measu- FAU
26.5 Fault - EM FAU
26.6 Reserved
26.7 Fault - Th FAU
thermistor overload
27.0 Fault - thermistor short cir- Th FAU
cuit
27.1 Fault - thermistor wire Th FAU
break
27.2 Reserved
27.3 Fault - TM TM FAU
tripping T>
sensor fault
out of range
27.6 Reserved
28.0 Faults - Fault - tripping I> Current measu- FAU
level monitoring rement
28.1 Fault - tripping I< Current measu- FAU
rement
28.2 Fault - UM FAU
tripping P>
28.3 Fault - UM FAU
tripping P<
28.4 Fault - UM FAU
tripping cosφ<
28.5 Fault - UM FAU
tripping U<
28.6 Fault - AM FAU
tripping 0/4-20 mA>
28.7 Fault - AM FAU
tripping 0/4-20 mA<
29.0 Fault - blocking Current measu- FAU
rement
29.1 Reserved
29.4 Fault - number of starts > BU1 BU2 FAU
29.5 Reserved
SIMOCODE pro
B-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Diagn.*
30.0 Faults - miscella- Fault - fault 1 BU1 BU2 FAU
neous
30.1 Fault - fault 2 BU1 BU2 FAU
30.4 Fault - fault 5 BU2 FAU
30.5 Fault - ext. fault 6 BU2 FAU
30.6 Reserved
30.7 Reserved
31.0 Fault - AM FAU
analog module wire break
31.1 Fault - BU1 BU2 FAU
test shutdown
31.2 Reserved
*)
The “DP-Diagn.” column contains the bits which are additionally available in the dia-
gnostics about
PROFIBUS DP:
F: Fault
S: Signal
W: Warning
F9, F16: Error types
**)
Signal - prm error number (bytes): If a parameterization is not possible, then the number
of the parameter group which caused the error is transmitted here.
You will find the parameter groups in the data records 130 to 133.
Example parameter group

...
Byte.Bit description
(Prm group)
0.0 coordination
4.0 device configuration
(see above) (12) parameter group 12
12.0 Bit parameter (16) parameter group 16
...
15.6 Ext. fault 3 -
effectiveness
...
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 B-13
B.5 Data record 94 - measured values

Byte.Bit Specification Type Range Unit Info
0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Heating up of the Byte 0 .. 255 See 2) Current measurement
motor model
5.0 Phase asymmetry Byte 0 .. 100 1% Current measurement
6.0 Cos φ Byte 0 .. 100 1% UM
12.0 Max. current I max Word 0 .. 65535 1% / Ie Current measurement
14.0 Current I L1 Word 0 .. 65535 1% / Ie Current measurement
20.0 Last tripping cur- Word 0 .. 65535 1% / Ie Current measurement
rent
22.0 Time to trip Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms Current measurement
24.0 Recovery time Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms Current measurement
26.0 Voltage UL1 Word 0 .. 65535 1V UM
32.0 AM - Output Word 0 .. 27648 siehe1) AM
34.0 AM - Input 1 Word 0 .. 27648 AM
36.0 AM - Input2 Word 0 .. 27648 AM
38.0 Reserved Word
40.0 TM - Temperature Word 0 .. 65535 1 K see3) TM
1
2
3
52.0 Real power D-word 0 .. 1W UM
0xFFFFFFFF
56.0 Apparent power D-word 0 .. 1 VA UM
0xFFFFFFFF
Table B-5: Data record 94 - measured values
1) S7 format: 0/4mA = 0
20mA = 27648
2) Representaion “heating up the motor model”:
Value always refers to symmetrical tripping level,
Representation in 2% steps in
Bits 6..0 (range 0 to 254%),
Bit 7 shows asymmetry (fixed level 50%).
3) Representation in Kelvin.
SIMOCODE pro
B-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
B.6 Data record 95 - Service/statistics data

Writing the service/statistics data
Writing is only possible if the password protection is not active.
Additional abbreviations
r/w: value can be written/ changed
r: value can only be read
Byte.Bit Specification Type Range Unit Info
0.0 Reserved Byte[4] 0
4.0 Permitted starts - actual Byte 0 .. 255 r/w BU1

value BU2
5.0 Reserved Byte
8.0 Number of parameteriza- Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1
tions BU2
10.0 Number of Word 0 .. 65535 r/w BU1
overload trippings BU2
12.0 Internal number Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1
overload trippings BU2
14.0 Stopped time Word 0 .. 65535 1h r/w BU1
BU2
16.0 Timer 1 - actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
32.0 Reserved Byte
40.0 Motor operating hours D-word 0 .. 1s r/w BU1
0xFFFFFFFF BU2
44.0 Int. motor operating D-word 0 .. 1s r BU1
hours 0xFFFFFFFF BU2
48.0 Device operating hours D-word 0 .. 1s r BU1
0xFFFFFFFF BU2
52.0 Number of starts D-word 0 .. r/w BU1
0xFFFFFFFF BU2
56.0 Internal number of starts D-word 0 .. r BU1
right 0xFFFFFFFF BU2
60.0 Internal number of starts D-word 0 .. r BU1
left 0xFFFFFFFF BU2
Table B-6: Data record 95 - diagnostics - statistics data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 B-15
B.7 Data record 130 - base device parameter 1

Device configuration
Byte.Bit Device configuration Type Range Note Info

0.0 Device class Byte 5, 9 5 = BU1 BU1 BU2
9 = BU2 BU2
1.0 Thermistor (Th) Bit 0, 1 1 = active; thermistor in the BU BU1 BU2
1.1 Reserved Bit[7]
2.0 Operator panel (OP) Bit 0, 1 BU1 BU2
2.1 Analog module (AM) Bit 0, 1 BU2
2.2 Temperature module (TM) Bit 0, 1 BU2
2.3 Earth-fault modules (EM) Bit 0, 1 BU2
2.4 Digital module 1 (DM1) Bit[2] 0 .. 2 0 = no digital module BU2
1 = monostable
2 = bistable
2.6 Digital module 2 (DM2) Bit[2] 0 .. 2 BU2
3.0 Reserved Bit[8]
4.0 Current measurement Bit[7] 0 .. 5 0 = no current measurement BU1 BU2
module (IM) 1 = 0.3 .. 3 A
2 = 2.4 .. 25 A
3 = 10 .. 100 A
4 = 20 .. 200 A
5 = 63 .. 630 A
4.7 Voltage measurement (UM) Bit 0, 1 BU2
5.0 Reserved
6.0 Control function (CF) 0x00 0x00 = overload BU1 BU2
0x10 0x10 = direct starter BU1 BU2
0x11 0x11 = reversing starter BU1 BU2
0x12 0x12 =linked switchgear BU1 BU2
0x20 0x20 = star-delta starter BU2
0x21 0x21 = star-delta starter with BU2
reversal of the direction of
rotation
0x30 0x30 = Dahlander BU2
0x31 0x31 = Dahlander with reversal BU2
of the direction of rotation
0x40 0x40 = pole-changing switch BU2
0x41 0x41 = pole-changing switch with BU2
reversal of the direction of
rotation
0x50 0x50 = valve BU2
0x60 0x60 =slider 1 BU2
0x70 0x70 =soft starter BU2
0x71 0x71 =soft reversing starter BU2
7.0 Reserved Bit[8]
Table B-7: Device configuration
SIMOCODE pro
B-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Base device parameter 1
Byte.Bit Specification Type Range Unit De- Note Info

fault
0.0 Coordination Byte[4]
4.0 Device configuration Byte[8] BU1 BU2
(see above) (12)
12.0 Bit parameter (16)
12.0 No configuration fault due to Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2
OP
12.1 Start-up parameter block Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2
active
12.2 Test/reset buttons blocked Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2
12.3 Bus and PLC/DCS - reset Bit 0, 1 0 0 = manual, BU1 BU2
1 = automatic
12.4 Reserved Bit 0
12.5 Reserved Bit 0
12.6 Reserved Bit 0
12.7 Reserved Bit 0
13.0 Diagnostics for Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2
process signals
process warnings
process faults
device faults
13.4 Reserved Bit 0
13.5 Reserved Bit 0
13.6 Bus monitoring Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2
13.7 Monitoring PLC/DCS Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2
14.0 Overload protection - type of Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 3-phase
load 1 = 1-phase
14.1 Overload protection - reset Bit 0, 1 0 0 = manual,
1 = automatic
14.2 Reserved Bit 0
14.3 Save switching command Bit 0, 1 0
14.4 Non-maintained command Bit 0, 1 0 CF<>0x00
mode
14.5 Cold starting level (TPF) Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact, BU1 BU2
1 = NC contact
14.6 Load type Bit 0, 1 0 0 = motor, BU1 BU2
1 = ohmic load
14.7 Reserved Bit 0
15.0 External fault 1 - type Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2
15.1 External fault 2 - type Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact, BU1 BU2
15.2 External fault 3 - type Bit 0, 1 0 1 = NC contact BU1 BU2
15.3 External fault 4 - type Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2
Table B-8: Data record 130 - base device parameter 1
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 B-17

fault
15.4 External fault 1 - Bit 0, 1 0 0 = always, BU1 BU2
effectiveness 1 = only motor ON
15.5 External fault 2 - Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2
effectiveness
effectiveness
effectiveness
16.0 Bit[2] parameters (20)
16.0 Thermistor - overload Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 3 0 = deactivated Th
response 1 = signal
16.2 Thermistor - response to sen- Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 2 2 = warn Th
sor error 3 3 = switch off
16.4 Internal earth fault - response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 0
3
16.6 Motor protection - overload Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3
response 3
17.0 Motor protection - overload Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2
response
17.2 Asymmetry protection - Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 2
response 3
17.4 Tripping response I> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0
17.6 Warning response I> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0
18.0 Tripping response I< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0
18.2 Warning response I< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0
18.4 Blocking protection - response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 0
3
18.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
19.0 Monitoring the number of Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 0 BU1 BU2
starts - response to overshoo- 3
ting
19.2 Monitoring the number of Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU1 BU2
starts - response to pre-
warning
19.4 Monitoring operating Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU1 BU2
hours - response
19.6 Monitoring stopped time - Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU1 BU2
response
20.0 Ext. fault 1 - response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 BU1 BU2
Table B-8: Data record 130 - base device parameter 1 (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
B-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

fault
21.2 Basic unit - debounce time Bit[2] 0 .. 3 10 ms 1 Offset 6 ms BU1 BU2
inputs
21.4 Timer 1 - type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 0 0 = with closing BU1 BU2
3 delay,
21.6 Timer 2 - type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 0 1 = closing delay BU1 BU2
3 with memory,
2 = with OFF delay,
3 = with fleeting clo-
sing
22.0 Signal conditioning 1 - type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 0 BU1 BU2
3 0 = non-inverting
22.2 Signal conditioning 2 - type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 0 1 = inverting BU1 BU2
3 2 = rising edge with
22.4 Non-volatile Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 0 memory BU1 BU2
element 1 - type 3 3 = falling edge with
22.6 Non-volatile Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 0 memory BU1 BU2
element 2 - type 3
23.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0 BU1 BU2
24.0 Bit[4] parameter (24) BU1 BU2
24.0 External fault 1 - Bit[4] 0 ... 1111B Bit[0] = panel reset, BU1 BU2
reset also by 1111B Bit[1] = automatic
24.4 External fault 2 - Bit[4] 0 ... 1111B reset, BU1 BU2
reset also by 1111B Bit[2] = remote reset,
Bit[3] = OFF com-
25.0 External fault 3 - Bit[4] 0 ... 1111B BU1 BU2
mand reset
reset also by 1111B
25.4 External fault 4 - Bit[4] 0 ... 1111B BU1 BU2
reset also by 1111B
26.0 Limit monitor - hysteresis for Bit[4] 0 .. 15 1% 5 BU1 BU2
limit monitoring
28.0 Byte parameters (28)
28.0 Interner earth fault - delay Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5
29.0 Overload protection - class Byte 5, 10 .. 10 BU1 BU2
35, 40
30.0 Motor protection - delay Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5
with overload operation
31.0 Asymmetry protection - Byte 0 .. 100 1% 40
level
32.0 Asymmetry protection - Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5
delay
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 B-19

fault
33.0 Interlocking time Byte 0 .. 255 1 s 0
34.0 F time Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 0 = deactivated
35.0 Tripping level I> Byte 0 .. 255 4% / Ie 0
36.0 Warning level I> Byte 0 .. 255 4% / Ie 0
37.0 Tripping level I< Byte 0 .. 255 4% / Ie 0
38.0 Warning level I< Byte 0 .. 255 4% / Ie 0
39.0 Blocking level Byte 0 .. 255 4% / Ie 0
40.0 Tripping delay I> Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5
41.0 Warning delay I> Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5
42.0 Tripping delay I< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5
43.0 Warning delay I< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5
44.0 Blocking delay Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5
45.0 Monitoring the number of Byte 1 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
starts - permitted starts
46.0 Reserved Byte 0
48.0 Truth table 1 3I/1O - type Byte 0 .. 0 BU1 BU2
111111
11B
111111
11B
111111
11B
52.0 Wort parameters (32)
52.0 Motor protection - cooling Word 0 .. 100 ms 3000
down time 65535
54.0 Motor protection - pause time Word 0 .. 100 ms 0 0 = deactivated
65535
56.0 Run time Word 0 .. 100 ms 10 0 = deactivated
65535
58.0 Monitoring the number of Word 0 .. 1s 0 BU1 BU2
starts - start time frame 65535
60.0 Monitoring the number of Word 0 .. 1s 0 BU1 BU2
starts - interlocking time 65535
62.0 Stopped time level > Word 0 .. 1h 0 BU1 BU2
65535
64.0 Timer 1 - limit value Word 0 .. 100 ms 0 BU1 BU2
65535
66.0 Timer 2 - limit value Word 0 .. 100 ms 0 BU1 BU2
65535
68.0 Counter 1 - limit value Word 0 .. 0 BU1 BU2
65535
70.0 Counter 2 - limit value Word 0 .. 0 BU1 BU2
65535
SIMOCODE pro
B-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

fault
72.0 Reserved Word 0
76.0 Part - D-word parameters
(36)
76.0 Operator enables Bit[32] 0 .. 0..0B
1..1B
80.0 Overload protection - D-word 0 .. 10 mA 30
set current Ie1 82000
84.0 Motor operating hours level > D-word 0 .. 1s 0 BU1 BU2
0xFFFFF
FFF
88.0 Reserved D-word 0
Grayed fields: parameters can be changed while running.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 B-21
B.8 Data record 131 - base device parameter 2 (plug )
Byte.Bit Specification Type Range De- Note Info

fault
4.0 BU - output 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
7.0 Reserved Byte 0
8.0 OP - LED green 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 OP
12.0 OP - LED yellow 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 OP
16.0 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.0 Byte 0 .. 255 105 Default: status - BU1 BU2
ON <
OFF
ON >
19.0 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.3 Byte 0 .. 255 128 Default: signal - BU1 BU2
overload operation
interlocking time
active
automatic mode of
operation
general fault
general warning
24.0 Cyclic signaling - bit 1.0 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
32.0 Acyclic signaling - bit 0.0 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
Table B-9: Data record 131 - base device parameter 2
SIMOCODE pro
B-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

fault
48.0 Monitoring PLC/ DCS input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
49.0 Motor protection - emergency start Byte 0 .. 255 60 Default: Cyclic con-
trolling -
bit 0.4
52.0 Mode selector S1 Byte 0 .. 255 61 Default: cyclic con- BU1 BU2
trolling -
bit 0.5
53.0 Mode selector S2 Byte 0 .. 255 2 Default: fixed level BU1 BU2
value‚ “1”
54.0 Control station - local control [LC] ON < Byte 0 .. 255 0
55.0 Control station - local control [LC] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 0
56.0 Control station - local control [LC] ON > Byte 0 .. 255 0
57.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON < Byte 0 .. 255 40 Default: cyclic con-
trolling -
bit 0.0
58.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 41 Default: cyclic con-
trolling -
bit 0.1
59.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON > Byte 0 .. 255 42 Default: cyclic con-
trolling -
bit 0.2
60.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON < Byte 0 .. 255 0
61.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 0
62.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON > Byte 0 .. 255 0
63.0 Control station - operator panel [OP] Byte 0 .. 255 0
ON <
OFF
ON >
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 B-23

fault
66.0 Control function - ON < Byte 0 .. 255 73 Default: general
control station ON
<
67.0 Control function - OFF Byte 0 .. 255 74 Default: general
control station OFF
68.0 Control function - ON > Byte 0 .. 255 75 Default: general
control station ON
>
69.0 Control function - Feedback ON Byte 0 .. 255 101 Default: status - BU1 BU2
motor current flo-
wing
70.0 External fault 1 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
74.0 External fault 1 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
78.0 Cold starting (TPF) Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
79.0 Test 1 - input Byte 0 .. 255 59 Default: cyclic con- BU1 BU2
trolling -
bit 0.3
80.0 Test 2 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
81.0 Reset 1 - input Byte 0 .. 255 62 Default: cyclic con- BU1 BU2
trolling -
bit 0.6
82.0 Reset 2 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
83.0 Reset 3 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
88.0 Truth table 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
3I/1O - input 1
3I/1O - input 2
3I/1O - input 3
3I/1O - input 1
3I/1O - input 2
3I/1O - input 3
3I/1O - input 1
SIMOCODE pro
B-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

fault
3I/1O - input 2
3I/1O - input 3
98.0 Timer 1 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
99.0 Timer 1 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
100.0 Timer 2 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
101.0 Timer 2 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
102.0 Counter 1 - input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
103.0 Counter 1 - input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
104.0 Counter 1 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
105.0 Counter 2 - input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
106.0 Counter 2 - input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
107.0 Counter 2 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
108.0 Signal conditioning 1 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
109.0 Signal conditioning 1 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
110.0 Signal conditioning 2 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
111.0 Signal conditioning 2 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
112.0 Non-volatile Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
element 1 - input
element 1 - reset
element 2 - input
element 2 - reset
116.0 Flashing 1 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
119.0 Flickering 1 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
122.0 Analog parameters (44)
122.0 PLC/DCS analog input Byte 0 .. 255 16 Default: max. cur- BU1 BU2
rent I_max
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 B-25
B.9 Data record DS132 - extended device parameter 1

fault
4.0 Part - bit parameters (17)
4.0 3UF50 compatibility mode Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
4.1 3UF50 mode of operation Bit 0, 1 0 0 = DPV0, BU2
1 = DPV1
4.2 Reserved Bit 0
4.3 Reserved Bit 0
4.4 Reserved Bit 0
4.5 Reserved Bit 0
4.6 Reserved Bit 0
4.7 Reserved Bit 0
5.0 Reserved Bit 0
5.1 Reserved Bit 0
5.2 Reserved Bit 0
5.3 Reserved Bit 0
5.4 Analog module - measuring Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 0..20 mA AM
range input 1 = 4-20 mA
5.5 Analog module - measuring Bit 0, 1 0 AM
range output
5.6 Reserved Bit 0
5.7 Reserved Bit 0
6.0 Limit value 1 Overshooting/ Bit 0, 1 0 0 =“<” (overshooting) BU2
undershooting 1 =“<” (undershoo-
6.1 Limit value 2 Overshooting/ Bit 0, 1 0 ting) BU2
undershooting
6.2 Limit value 3 Overshooting/ Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
undershooting
6.3 Limit value 4 Overshooting/ Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
undershooting
6.4 Reserved Bit 0
6.5 OPO level Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact, BU2
1 = NC contact
6.6 Slider response for OPO Bit 0, 1 0 0 = closed, BU2
1 = open
6.7 Reserved Bit 0
7.0 External fault 5 - type Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact, BU2
7.1 External fault 6 - type Bit 0, 1 0 1 = NC contact BU2
7.2 Reserved Bit 0
7.3 Reserved Bit 0
7.4 Monitoring external fault 5 Bit 0, 1 0 0 = always BU2
7.5 Monitoring external fault 6 Bit 0, 1 0 1 = only motor ON BU2
Table B-10: Data record DS132 - extended device parameter 1
SIMOCODE pro
B-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

fault
7.6 Reserved Bit 0
7.7 Reserved Bit 0
8.0 Reserved Bit 0
8.1 Reserved Bit 0
8.2 Reserved Bit 0
8.3 Reserved Bit 0
8.4 Timestamping active Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
8.5 Reserved Bit 0
8.6 Reserved Bit 0
8.7 Reserved Bit 0
9.0 Reserved Bit 0
9.1 Reserved Bit 0
9.2 Reserved Bit 0
9.3 Reserved Bit 0
9.4 Reserved Bit 0
9.5 Reserved Bit 0
9.6 Reserved Bit 0
9.7 Reserved Bit 0
10.0 Bit[2] parameters
10.0 3UF50 base type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU2
10.6 UVO mode of operation Bit[2] 0, 1 0 0 = deactivated, BU2
1 = activated
11.0 Monitoring tripping U< Bit[2] 1, 2 1 1 = on+ (always, UM
11.2 Monitoring warning U< Bit[2] 1, 2 1 not TPF) UM
2 = run (Motor ON,
not TPF)
12.0 Monitoring Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 0 0 = on (always) AM
Tripping 0/4-20 mA> 3 1 = on+ (always, not
TPF)
2 = run (motor ON,
not TPF)
3 = run+ (motor ON,
not TPF,
start hiding)
Table B-10: Data record DS132 - extended device parameter 1 (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 B-27

fault
12.2 Monitoring Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 0 AM
warning 0/4-20 mA> 3
tripping 0/4-20 mA< 3
warning 0/4-20 mA< 3
13.0 Monitoring limit value 1 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 0 BU2
3
3
3
3
15.0 DM - debounce time inputs Bit[2] 0 .. 3 10 ms 1 Offset 6ms DM1
DM2
15.2 AM - response with a wire Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 2 AM
break 0 = deactivated
1 = signal
15.4 EM - response to an external Bit[2] 1, 3 1 EM
2 = warn
earth fault
3 = switch off
15.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 EM
17.0 TM - tripping response T> Bit[2] 1, 3 3 0 = deactivated TM
17.2 TM - warning response T> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 1 = signal TM
17.4 TM - response to a sensor Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 2 2 = warn TM
error/ out of range 3 3 = switch off
17.6 TM - active sensor Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 0: 1 sensor TM
1: 2 sensor
3: 3 sensor
SIMOCODE pro
B-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

fault
18.0 Tripping response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM
18.2 Warning response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM
18.4 Tripping response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM
18.6 Warning response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM
19.0 Tripping response cosφ< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM
19.2 Warning response cosφ< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = deactivated UM
1 = signal
19.4 Tripping response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 2 = warn UM
19.6 Warning response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 3 = switch off UM
20.0 Tripping response 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 AM
20.2 Warning response 0/4-20 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM
mA>
20.4 Tripping response 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 AM
20.6 Warning response 0/4-20 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM
mA<
22.0 Ext. fault 5 - response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 0 = deactivated BU2
22.2 Ext. fault 6 - response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 1 = signal BU2
2 = warn
3 = switch off
23.0 Trace - trigger edge Bit[2] 0,1 0 0 = positive, 1 = negative BU2
25.0 Timer 3 type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 0 0 = with closing BU2
3 delay, 1 = closing
25.2 Timer 4 - type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 0 delay with memory, BU2
3 2 = with OFF delay, 3
= with fleeting clo-
sing
25.4 Signal conditioning 3 - type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 0 BU2
3
0 = non-inverting
25.6 Signal conditioning 4 - type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 0 1 = inverting BU2
3 2 = rising edge with
26.0 Non-volatile Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 0 memory BU2
element 3 - type 3 3 = falling edge with
memory
26.2 Non-volatile Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 0 BU2
element 4 - type 3
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 B-29

fault
28.0 Bit[4] parameters (25)
28.0 TM - sensor type Bit[3] 000B 000B 000B = PT100, TM
+Bit ... 001B = PT1000,
100B 010B = KTY83,
011B = KTY84,
100B = NTC
29.0 External fault 5 - Bit[4] 0 .. 0101 Bit[0] = panel reset, BU2
Reset also by 1111B Bit[1] = automatic
29.4 External fault 6 - Bit[4] 0 .. 1111B reset, BU2
reset also by 1111B Bit[2] = remote reset,
Bit[3] = OFF com-
mand reset
32.0 Truth table 7 2I/1O - type Bit[4] 0 .. 0 BU2
1111B
32.4 Truth table 8 2I/1O - type Bit[4] 0 .. 0 BU2
1111B
34.0 Hysteresis P - cos phi - U Bit[4] 0...15 0 1% UM
34.4 Hysteresis 0/4-20 mA Bit[4] 0...15 0 1% AM
35.0 Hysteresis free limit values Bit[4] 0...15 0 1% BU2
37.0 EM - delay Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 EM

38.0 Level tripping cosφ< Byte 0 .. 100 1% 0 UM
39.0 Warning level cosφ< Byte 0 .. 100 1% 0 UM
40.0 Tripping level U< Byte 0 .. 255 8 V 0 UM
41.0 Warning level U< Byte 0 .. 255 8 V 0 UM
42.0 Tripping level Byte 0 .. 255 *128 0 AM
0/4-20 mA>
43.0 Warning level Byte 0 .. 255 *128 0 AM
0/4-20 mA>
SIMOCODE pro
B-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

fault
44.0 Tripping level Byte 0 .. 255 *128 0 AM
0/4-20 mA<
45.0 Warning level Byte 0 .. 255 *128 0 AM
0/4-20 mA<
46.0 Tripping delay P> Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM
47.0 Warning delay P> Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM
48.0 Tripping delay P< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM
49.0 Warning delay P< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM
50.0 Tripping level cosφ< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM
51.0 Warning delay cosφ< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM
52.0 Tripping delay U< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM
53.0 Warning delay U< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM
54.0 Tripping Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 AM
delay 0/4-20 mA>
55.0 Warning delay 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 AM
56.0 Tripping Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 AM
delay 0/4-20 mA<
57.0 Warning delay 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 AM
58.0 Delay limit value 1 Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 BU2
62.0 TM - hysteresis Byte 0 .. 255 1K 5 TM
63.0 Maximum time for star opera- Byte 0 .. 255 1s 20 CF = star-delta star-
tion ter
64.0 UVO time Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 0 BU2
65.0 Staggering time Byte 0 .. 255 1s 0 BU2

66.0 Trace-Pretrigger Byte 0 .. 20 5% 0 BU2
70.0 Truth table 4 3I/1O - type Byte 0 .. 0 BU2
111111
11B
111111
11B
111111
11B
76.0 Word parameters (33)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 B-31

fault
76.0 Analog module - start value Word 0 .. 0 Value for 0/4 mA AM
output 65535
78.0 Analog module - end value Word 0 .. 27648 Value for 20 mA AM
output 65535
80.0 TM - Tripping level T> Word 0 .. 1K 0 TM
65535
82.0 TM - Warning response T> Word 0 .. 1K 0 TM
65535
84.0 Limit monitor 1 - limit value Word 0 .. 0 BU2
65535
65535
65535
65535
92.0 Timer 3 - limit value Word 0 .. 100 ms 0 BU2
65535
94.0 Timer 4 - limit value Word 0 .. 100 ms 0 BU2
65535
96.0 Counter 3 - limit value Word 0 .. 0 BU2
65535
98.0 Counter 4 - limit value Word 0 .. 0 BU2
65535
100.0 Pause time Word 0 .. 10 ms 0
65535
102.0 Reserved Word 0 .. 1 ms 100 BU2
65535
SIMOCODE pro
B-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

fault
108.0 Part - D-word parameters
(37)
108.0 Overload protection - D-word 0 .. 10 mA 0
set current Ie2 82000
112.0 Tripping level P> D-word 0 .. 1W 0 UM
0xFFFF
FFFF
116.0 Warning level P> D-word 0 .. 1W 0 UM
0xFFFF
FFFF
120.0 Tripping level P< D-word 0 .. 1W 0 UM
0xFFFF
FFFF
124.0 Warning level P< D-word 0 .. 1W 0 UM
0xFFFF
FFFF
128.0 Truth table 9 Bit [32] 0 .. 0 BU2
5I/2O type - output 1 1..1B
132.0 Truth table 9 Bit [32] 0 .. 0 BU2
5I/2O type - output 2 1..1B
Grayed fields: parameters can be changed while running.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 B-33
B.10 Data record 133 - extended device parameter 2

(plug )

fault
4.0 Byte parameter (41)
4.0 DM1 - output 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM1
5.0 DM1 - output 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM1
6.0 DM2 - output 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM2
7.0 DM2 - output 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM2
8.0 Reserved Byte 0
9.0 Reserved Byte 0
12.0 Timestamping - input 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
22.0 Control station - local control [LC] ON<< Byte 0 .. 255 0
23.0 Control station - local control [LC] ON>> Byte 0 .. 255 0
24.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON<< Byte 0 .. 255 0
25.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON>> Byte 0 .. 255 0
26.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON<< Byte 0 .. 255 0
27.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON>> Byte 0 .. 255 0
ON>>
29.0 Control station - operator panel [OP]<>/ Byte 0 .. 255 0
<<>>
30.0 Control function - ON<< Byte 0 .. 255 0
31.0 Control function - ON>> Byte 0 .. 255 0
32.0 Auxiliary control input - FC Byte 0 .. 255 0
33.0 Auxiliary control input - FO Byte 0 .. 255 0
34.0 Auxiliary control input - TC Byte 0 .. 255 0
35.0 Auxiliary control input - TO Byte 0 .. 255 0
36.0 External fault 5 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
37.0 External fault 6 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
Table B-11: Data record 133 - extended device parameter
SIMOCODE pro
B-34 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

fault
40.0 External fault 5 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
41.0 External fault 6 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
44.0 UVO error Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
45.0 OPO error Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
46.0 Truth table 4 3I/1O - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
input 1
input 2
input 3
input 1
input 2
input 3
input 1
input 2
input 3
input 1
input 2
input 1
input 2
input 1
input 2
input 3
input 4
input 5
64.0 Timer 3 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
65.0 Timer 3 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
67.0 Timer 4 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
Table B-11: Data record 133 - extended device parameter (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 B-35

fault
68.0 Counter 3 - input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
69.0 Counter 3 - input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
70.0 Counter 3 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
71.0 Counter 4 - input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
73.0 Counter 4 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
74.0 Signal conditioner 3 - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
input
reset
input
77.0 Signal conditioning 4 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
78.0 Non-volatile Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
element 3 - input
element 3 - reset
element 4 - input
element 4 - reset
88.0 Analog parameters (45)
88.0 Analog module - output Byte 0 .. 255 0 AM
89.0 Analog input limit value 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
94.0 Trace - analog input Byte 0...255 0 BU2
95.0 PLC/DCS analog input 2 Byte 0...255 0 BU2
Table B-11: Data record 133 - extended device parameter (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
B-36 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
B.11 Data record 139 - labeling

The diagnostics
• External fault 1 to 6 (signals, warnings and faults)
• Limit value 1 to 4 (signals),
• TM warning T>/ tripping T> (signals, warnings and faults)
• Warning/ tripping 0/4-20 mA<> (signals, warnings and faults)
can be parameterized to have various meanings e.g. fill level >, stock hot
etc. To simplify the diagnostics, these texts can be saved in the device.
These can be created, read out and displayed with SIMOCODE ES, for
example. The texts have no functionality.
Byte.Bit Specification Type Information
10.0 Labeling - external fault 1 Byte[10] BU1 BU2
50.0 Labeling - external fault 5 Byte[10] BU2
60.0 Labeling - external fault 6 Byte[10] BU2
90.0 Labeling limit value 1 Byte[10] BU2
130.0 Labeling TM warning T> Byte[10] BU2
140.0 Labeling TM tripping T> Byte[10] BU2
150.0 Labeling warning 0/4-20 mA> Byte[10] BU2
160.0 Labeling warning 0/4-20 mA< Byte[10] BU2
170.0 Labeling tripping 0/4-20 mA> Byte[10] BU2
180.0 Labeling tripping 0/4-20 mA< Byte[10] BU2
Table B-12: Data record 139 - labeling
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 B-37
B.12 Data record 160 - communication parameters
Attention
Only the address is relevant for writing. The baud rate is recognized automa-
tically. The current baud rate is read.
Byte Specification Info
0.0 Coordination
4.0 Station address

BU1
5.0 Baud rate
BU2
6.0 to 11.0 Reserved
Table B-13: Data record 160 - communication parameters
B.13 Data record 165 - comment
Byte.Bit Specification Type Info
4.0 System designation Byte[32]

BU1
36.0 Location identification Byte[22]
BU2
58.0 Date Byte[16]
112.0 Comment Byte[54]
Table B-14: Data record 165 - comment
SIMOCODE pro
B-38 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
B.14 Data record 202 - Acyclic controlling

Description
The acylic control data can be used for any functions. The control data is
available as device-internal outputs (sockets).
4.0 Acyclic controlling - bit 0.0 Bit

BU1
4.7 Acyclic controlling - bit 0.7 Bit BU2
6.0 Acyclic controlling - analog value Word
Table B-15: Data record 202 - Acyclic controlling
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 B-39
B.15 Data record 203 - Acyclic signaling

Description
Any data can be transmitted via the acyclic signaling data. The control data
is available as device-internal inputs (plugs).
0.0 Acyclic signaling - bit 0.0 Bit
0.6 Acyclic signaling - bit 0.6 Bit BU1

BU2
Table B-16: Data record 203 - Acyclic signaling
SIMOCODE pro
B-40 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
B.16 Data record 224 - password protection

Description
• Password protection on
If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection is
activated and the password is accepted. If, at the time of receiving, “pass-
word protection on” and the password are not the same, the signal “signal -
password false” is set and no change is carried out.
• Password protection off
If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection
is deactivated. If the password is false, the signal “signal - password false” is
set and no change is carried out.
4 Control flag:0 = password protection off Bit

1 = password protection on BU1
BU2
4.1 Reserved Bit[31]
8.0 Password Byte[8]
Table B-17: Data record 224 - password protection
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 B-41
SIMOCODE pro
B-42 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Dimension Drawings C
In this chapter
This chapter contains the technical dimension drawings of the
SIMOCODE pro system components.
Target groups
• configurators
• technicians.
Necessary knowledge
• good knowledge about configuring switchgear.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 C-1
Dimension Drawings
C.1 3UF70 basic unit

C.1.1 SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7 000 basic unit
12
106
80
5
45 5 36
86 4
C.1.2 SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7 010 basic unit

12
106
80
5
45 5 65
115 4
SIMOCODE pro
C-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Dimension Drawings
C.2 3UF710 current measurement module

3UF7 100, 0.3 A to 3 A,
3UF7 101, 2.4 A up to 25 A
84
45 5 40
8
T1 T3
38
T2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 C-3
Dimension Drawings

3UF7 102, 10 A to 100 A
94
55 5 67
14
T1
T3
65
T2
SIMOCODE pro
C-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Dimension Drawings

3UF7 103, 20 A to 200 A
120
95
79
95
7 5 140
78
25
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 C-5
Dimension Drawings

3UF7 103, 20 A to 200 A
120
95
37 17
9
119
95
79
7 5 47
140
84
SIMOCODE pro
C-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Dimension Drawings

3UF7 104, 63 A to 630 A
145
50 25
11
57
147
122
125 85
9
60.5 6
148
60.5
6
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 C-7
Dimension Drawings
C.3 3UF7 200 operator panel
29
36
96 8 29 7
SIMOCODE pro
C-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Dimension Drawings
C.4 3UF7 3 digital module
10
92
68
22.5 5 115 4
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 C-9
Dimension Drawings
C.5 Accessories
C.5.1 Door adapter
38.2
45.5
17.4
SIMOCODE pro
C-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Technical Data D
In this chapter
This chapter contains the technical data about SIMOCODE pro.
Target groups
• configurators
Necessary knowledge
• good knowledge about configuring switchgear
• good knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 D-1
Technical Data
D.1 Common technical data

Permiss. envir. temperature
In operation -25 ... +60 °C
during storage and transport -40 ... +80 °C
Site height above sea level
< 2000 m
< 3000 m max. +50 °C (no safe isolation)
< 4000 m max. +40 °C (no safe isolation)
Degree of protection (according
to 60529)
all components (except current IP20
measurement module, rail connec-
tion, operator panel and door adap-
ter)
Current measurement module with IP00
rail connection
Operator panel (front) and door IP54
adapter (front) with cover
Shock resistance (sine pulse) 15 g/11 ms
Installation location Arbitrary
Frequencies 50/60 Hz ± 5%
EMC stability corresponds to degree of severity 3
according to IEC 60947-1
Conducted interference-signal injec- 2 kV (power ports) over-voltage limitter
tion, burst according to IEC 61000- is required for inductive loads.
4-4 1 kV (signal ports)
Conducted interference signal injec- 2 kV (line to earth)
tion, burst according to IEC 61000- 1 kV (line to earth)
4-5
Electrostatic discharging, 8 kV (air discharge)
ESD according to IEC 61000-4-2 6 kV (contact discharge)
Field-related interference signal 10 V/m
according to IEC 61000-4-3
EMC emitted interference correponds to degree of severity A
according to IEC 60947-1
This is a Class A product. This product can DIN EN 55011/DIN EN 55022 (CISPR11/CISPR22)
cause radio interference if used in a dome-
stic environment. The user must provide
suitable countermeasures if required.
Conducted and emitted
interference
Safe isolation All circuits in SIMOCODE pro are isolated from each other
according to IEC 60947-1 according to IEC 60947-1, i.e. dimensioned with double cree-
page distance and air gap.
Follow the information contained in “Test report” no. 2668
SIMOCODE pro
D-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Technical Data
D.2 Basic units
Mounting Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard rails or

Screw attachment using additional push-in lugs
Display
• Red/green “DEVICE” LED Green: “Ready for operation”
Red: “Function test was negative, device is locked”
Off: “No control supply voltage”
• Green “BUS” LED Continuous light:“Communication with PLC/DCS”
Flashing: “Baud rate recognized/communication with PC/pro-
gramming device”
• Red “GEN. FAULT” LED Continuous light/flashing: “Feeder fault”, e.g. overload tripping
“Test/reset” button • Resetting the device after tripping
• Function test (system self-test)
• Operation of memory module, addressing plug
System interfaces
• Front Connecting an operator panel or expansion module. In addition,
the memory module, addressing plug or a PC cable for parame-
terization can be connected to the system interface
• Underside: Connecting a current measurement module
PROFIBUS DP interface
• Interface design RS485
• Connection 9-pole SUB-D socket (12 MBit)
Terminals (1.5 MBit) connection cross section like control circuit
Connecting a PROFIBUC DP cable using the cable connection
or the 9-pole SUB-D socket
Rated control voltage Us (accor- 110 - 240 V AC/DC, 50/60 Hz 24 V DC
ding to DIN EN 61131-2)
Operating range 0.85 to 1.1 x Us 0.8 to 1.2 x Us
Power consumption
• Basic unit 1 (3UF7000) 7 VA 5W
• Basic unit 2 (3UF7010) 10 VA 7W
(including two expansion modules
connected to basic unit 2)
Rated isolation voltage Ui 300 V (for degree of pollution 3)
Rated surge voltage strength 4 kV
Uimp
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 D-3
Technical Data
Relay outputs:
• Number 3 monostable relay outputs
• Auxiliary contacts of the 3 relay The isolated NO contacts, of which 2 relay outputs have a com-
outputs mon root and one is separate, can be freely assigned to control
functions (e.g. network, star or delta contactor or signaling of
an operating state). (NC contact response can be parameteri-
zed via internal signal conditioning).
• Predefined short-circuit protection • Fast fuse link, operating class gL/gG 6 A, 10 A
for auxiliary contacts (relay out- (IEC 60947-5-1)
puts) • 1.6 A, C-characteristic circuit breaker
(IEC 60947-5-1)
• 6 A, C-characteristic (Ik < 500 A) circuit breaker
• Rated uninterrupted current 6A
• Rated switching capacity AC-15 6 A / 24 V AC
6 A / 120 V AC
3 A / 230 V AC
DC-13 2 A / 24 V DC
0.55 A / 60 V DC
0.25 A / 125 V DC
Inputs (binary) The 4 inputs with a common root, that are supplied via the
device electronics (24 V DC), for measuring process signals
(e.g. local control, key-operated switch, end position switch,
...), can be freely assigned to the control functions.
• 24 V DC
Cable lengths 300 m
Input characteristic curve Type 1 according to
EN 61131-2
Thermistor motor protection
(binary PTC)
• Total cold resistance < 1.5 kOhm
• Response value 3.4 to 3.8 kOhm
• Return value 1.5 to 1.65 kOhm
• Cable lengths Cross-section: 2.5 mm2 Lengths:2x250 m
1.5 mm2 2x150 m
0.5 mm2 2x50 m
Connection cross-sections
• Tightening torque 0.8 to 1.2 Nm
• solid 1 x (0.5 to 4.0); 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm2
• stranded, with end sleeves 1 x (0.5 to 2.5); 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm2
• AWG cable 2 x 20 to 14
SIMOCODE pro
D-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Technical Data
D.3 Current measurement modules
Mounting
• Set current Ie = 0.3 to 3 A; Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard rails or screw attach-
2.4 to 25 A; 10 to 100 A (3UF7100, ment via additional plug-in lugs
3UF7101, 3UF7102)
• Set current Ie = 20 to 200 A Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard rails, screw attach-
(3UF7103) ment onto mounting plates or directly to the contactor
• Set current Ie = 63 to 630 A Screw attachment onto the mounting plate or directly onto the
(3UF7104) contactor
System interfaces For connection to a basic unit
Set current Ie 3UF7100; 3UF7101; 3UF7102 3UF7103; 3UF7104
0.3 to 3 A; 2.4 to 25 A; 20 to 200 A; 63 to 630 A
10 to 100 A
• Rated isolation voltage Ui (for 690 V 1000 V
degree of pollution 3)
• Rated surge voltage strength 6 kV 8 kV
Uimp
• Measurement frequency 50/60 Hz
• Type of current three-phase current
• Short-circuit Additional short-circuit protection in main circuit
required1)
• Accuracy of the current measure- (in the range 1x the minimum setting current Iu to 8x the maxi-
ment mum set current Io) +/- 3 %
Push-through opening Diameter
• Set current 0.3 to 3 A; 7.5 mm
2.4 to 25 A:
• Set current 10 to 100 A; 14.0 mm
• Set current 20 to 200 A; 25.0 mm
Rail connection 2)
• Set current Ie 20 to 200 A 63 to 630 A
• Connection screw M8x20 M10x30
• Tightening torque 10 to 14 Nm 14 to 24 Nm
• solid with cable lug 16 to 95 mm2 3) 50 to 240 mm2 4)
23
• multiple wire with cable lug 25 to 120 mm ) 70 to 240 mm2 4)
• AWG cable 6 to 3/0 kcmil 1/0 to 500 kcmil
1) More informationen under http://www.siemens.de/simocode and section D.6 Short-circuit protection with
fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V on page D-8.
2) Screw connection is possible with a suitable box terminal 3RT19.
3) The 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover is required to maintain the phase separation when connecting cable lugs to
cables with a cross-section larger than 95 mm2, according to DIN 46235.
4) The 3RT19 66-4EA1 terminal cover is required to maintain the phase separation when connecting cable lugs to
cables with a cross-section larger than 240 mm 2, according to DIN 46234, and to cables larger than 185 mm 2
according to DIN 46235.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 D-5
Technical Data
D.4 Expansion modules (digital modules)
Mounting Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard rail or

screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs
Display
• Green “READY” LED Continuous light:“Ready for operation”
Flashing: “No connection to basic unit”
System interfaces For connecting a basic unit or expansion module
Rated isolation current Ui 300 V (for degree of pollution 3)
Rated surge voltage strength 4 kV
Uimp
Relay outputs:
• Number 2 mono or bistable relay outputs (depending on type)
• Auxiliary contacts of the The isolated NO contacts of all relay outputs with a common
2 relay outputs root can be freely assigned to control functions (e.g. network,
star or delta contactor or signaling of an operating state).
(NC contact response can be parameterized via internal signal
conditioning).
• Predefined short-circuit protec- Fast fuse link, operating class gL/gG 6 A, 10 A (IEC 60947-5-1)
tion for auxiliary contacts (relay 1.6 A, C-characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1) circuit breaker
outputs) 6 A, C-characteristic (Ik < 500 A) circuit breaker
Rated uninterrupted current 6A
Rated switching capacity
• AC-15 6 A / 24 V AC
6 A / 120 V AC
3 A / 230 V AC
• DC-13 2 A / 24 V DC
0.55 A / 60 V DC
0.25 A / 125 V DC
Inputs (binary) The 4 externally powered inputs (DC 24 V or 110-240 V AC/
DC), have inputs with a common root dependant on their
type. They are used for measuring process signals (e.g. local
control, key-operated switches, end position switches, ...)
and can be freely assigned to the control functions.
• 24 V DC
Cable lengths 300 m
Input characteristic curve Type 2 according to EN 61131-2
• 110 V up to 240 V AC/DC
Cable lengths 200 m (cable capacitance 300 nF/km)
Input characteristic curve —
SIMOCODE pro
D-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Technical Data
Connection cross-sections
Tightening torque 0.8 to 1.2 Nm
• solid 1 x (0.5 to 4.0); 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm2
• stranded, with end sleeves 1 x (0.5 to 2.5); 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm2
• AWG cable 2 x 20 to 14
D.5 Operator panel
Mounting Installing in a switching-cabinet door and/or in a front panel,

with system interface covering IP 54
Display
• Red/green “DEVICE” LED Green: “Ready for operation”
Green, flashing:“No connection to basic unit”
Red: “Function test was negative, device is locked”
Off: “No control supply voltage”
• Green “BUS” LED Continuous light: “Communication with PLC/DCS”
Flashing: “Baud rate recognized / communication with
PC/programming device”
• Red “GEN. FAULT” LED Continuous light/flashing: “Feeder fault”,
e.g. overload tripping
• 3 yellow LEDs / 4 green LEDs Can be freely assigned to any status signal
Buttons
• Test/reset • Resetting the device after tripping
• Function test (system self-test)
• Operation of memory module, addressing plug
• Operation buttons • For controlling the motor feeder, freely assignable
System interfaces
• Front For connecting a memory module, an addressing plug or a PC
cable for parameterization
• Rear side Connection to the basic unit or an expansion module
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 D-7
Status: 05/01/20 690V
3)
D-8
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders. Fast fuse links
D.6
designed for short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V NH Type 3NA
for 3UF7 DIAZED Type 5SB

NEOZED Type 5SE
Overload relay Contactor CLASS Operating class

Setting range 5 u.10 15 20 25 30 35 40 gL(gG)
Technical Data
(Type) Rated operating current Ie/AC-3 in A for

5)
Test current "r" Type of assignment
400V / 500V / 690V 400V / 500V / 690V 400V / 500V / 690V 400V / 500V / 690V 400V / 500V / 690V 400V / 500V / 690V 400V / 500V / 690V 1 2
0.3 - 3.0A 3RT1015 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 35 20
3RT1016 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 35 20
2.4 - 25A 3RT1015 7,0 / 5,0 / 4,0 7,0 / 5,0 / 4,0 7,0 / 5,0 / 4,0 7,0 / 5,0 / 4,0 7,0 / 5,0 / 4,0 7,0 / 5,0 / 4,0 7,0 / 5,0 / 4,0 35 20
3RT1016 9,0 / 6,5 5,2 9,0 / 6,5 5,2 9,0 / 6,5 5,2 9,0 / 6,5 5,2 9,0 / 6,5 5,2 9,0 / 6,5 / 5,2 8,5 / 6,5 5,2 35 20
3RT1017 12,0 / 9,0 / 6,3 11,0 / 9,0 / 6,3 10,0 / 9,0 / 6,3 9,5 / 9,0 / 6,3 9,0 / 9,0 / 6,3 9,0 / 9,0 / 6,3 8,5 / 8,5 / 6,3 35 20
3RT1023 9,0 / 6,5 / 5,2 9,0 / 6,5 / 5,2 9,0 / 6,5 / 5,2 63 25
3RT1024 12,0 / 12,0 / 9,0 12,0 / 12,0 / 9,0 12,0 / 12,0 / 9,0 12,0 / 12,0 / 9,0 12,0 / 12,0 / 9,0 12,0 / 12,0 / 9,0 12,0 / 12,0 / 9,0 63 25
3RT1025 17,0 / 17,0 / 13,0 17,0 / 17,0 / 13,0 16,0 / 16,0 / 13,0 15,0 / 15,0 / 13,0 14,0 / 14,0 / 13,0 13,0 / 13,0 / 13,0 12,0 / 12,0 / 12,0 63 25
3RT1026 25,0 / 18,0 / 13,0 18,0 / 18,0 / 13,0 16,0 / 16,0 / 13,0 15,0 / 15,0 / 13,0 14,0 / 14,0 / 13,0 13,0 / 13,0 / 13,0 12,0 / 12,0 / 12,0 100 35
3RT1034 25,0 / 25,0 / 20,0 25,0 / 25,0 / 20,0 22,3 / 22,3 / 20,0 20,3 / 20,3 / 20,3 19,1 / 19,1 / 19,1 17,6 / 17,6 / 17,6 16,1 / 16,1 / 16,1 125 63
3RT1035 25,0 / 25,0 / 24,0 25,0 / 25,0 / 24,0 25,0 / 25,0 / 24,0 25,0 / 25,0 / 24,0 25,0 / 25,0 / 24,0 25,0 / 25,0 / 24,0 23,5 / 23,5 / 23,5 125 63
10-100A 3RT1034 32,0 / 32,0 / 20,0 25,5 / 25,5 / 20,0 22,3 / 22,3 / 20,0 20,3 / 20,3 / 20,0 19,1 / 19,1 / 19,1 17,6 / 17,6 / 17,6 16,1 / 16,1 / 16,1 125 63
3RT1035 40,0 / 40,0 / 24,0 33,0 / 33,0 / 24,0 29,4 / 29,4 / 24,0 28,0 / 28,0 / 24,0 26,5 / 26,5 / 24,0 25,0 / 25,0 / 24,0 23,5 / 23,5 / 23,5 125 63
3RT1036 50,0 / 50,0 / 24,0 38,5 / 38,5 / 24,0 32,7 / 32,7 / 24,0 29,4 / 29,4 / 24,0 26,5 / 26,5 / 24,0 25,0 / 25,0 / 24,0 23,5 / 23,5 / 23,5 160 80
3RT1044 65,0 / 65,0 / 47,0 56,0 / 56,0 / 47,0 49,0 / 49,0 / 47,0 45,0 / 45,0 / 45,0 41,7 / 41,7 / 41,7 38,2 / 38,2 / 38,2 34,5 / 34,5 / 34,5 200 125
3RT1045 80,0 / 80,0 / 58,0 61,0 / 61,0 / 58,0 53,0 / 53,0 / 53,0 47,0 / 47,0 / 47,0 45,0 / 45,0 / 45,0 43,0 / 43,0 / 43,0 40,0 / 40,0 / 40,0 200 160
3RT1046 95,0 / 95,0 / 58,0 69,0 / 69,0 / 58,0 59,0 / 59,0 / 58,0 53,0 / 53,0 / 53,0 50,0 / 50,0 / 50,0 47,0 / 47,0 / 47,0 44,0 / 44,0 / 44,0 200 160
3RT1054 100,0 / 100,0 / 100,0 93,2 / 93,2 / 93,2 81,7 / 81,7 / 81,7 74,8 / 74,8 / 74,8 69,0 / 69,0 / 69,0 63,0 / 63,0 / 63,0 57,0 / 57,0 / 57,0 355 315
3RT1055 100,0 / 100,0 / 100,0 100,0 / 100,0 / 100,0 97,5 / 97,5 / 97,5 90,0 / 90,0 / 90,0 82,0 / 82,0 / 82,0 74,0 / 74,0 / 74,0 355 315
20-200A 3RT1054 115,0 / 115,0 / 115,0 93,2 / 93,2 / 93,2 81,7 / 81,7 / 81,7 74,8 / 74,8 / 74,8 69,0 / 69,0 / 69,0 64,0 / 64,0 / 64,0 355 315
3RT1055 150 / 150 / 150 122 / 122 / 122 107 / 107 / 107 98 / 98 / 98 90 / 90 / 90 82 / 82 / 82 74 / 74 / 74 355 315
3RT1056 185 / 185 / 170 150 / 150 / 150 131 / 131 / 131 120 / 120 / 120 111 / 111 / 111 102 / 102 / 102 93 / 93 / 93 355 315
63-630A 3RT1064 225 / 225 / 225 182 / 182 / 182 160 / 160 / 160 146 / 146 / 146 135 / 135 / 135 126 / 126 / 126 500 400
3RT1065 265 / 265 / 265 215 / 215 / 215 188 / 188 / 188 172 / 172 / 172 159 / 159 / 159 146 / 146 / 146 133 / 133 / 133 500 400
3RT1066 300 / 300 / 280 243 / 243 / 243 213 / 213 / 213 195 / 195 / 195 180 / 180 / 180 165 / 165 / 165 150 / 150 / 150 500 400
3RT1075 400 / 400 / 400 324 / 324 / 324 284 / 284 / 284 260 / 260 / 260 240 / 240 / 240 220 / 220 / 220 200 / 200 / 200 630 400
3RT1076 500 / 500 / 450 405 / 405 / 405 355 / 355 / 355 325 / 325 / 325 300 / 300 / 300 275 / 275 / 275 250 / 250 / 250 630 500
3RT1264 225 / 225 / 225 225 / 225 / 225 225 / 225 / 225 194 / 194 / 194 173 / 173 / 173 152 / 152 / 152 131 / 131 / 131 500 500
3RT1265 265 / 265 / 265 265 / 265 / 265 265 / 265 / 265 228 / 228 / 228 204 / 204 / 204 180 / 180 / 180 156 / 156 / 156 500 500
short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V
3RT1266 300 / 300 / 300 300 / 300 / 300 300 / 300 / 300 258 / 258 / 258 231 / 231 / 231 204 / 204 / 204 177 / 177 / 177 500 500
3RT1275 400 / 400 / 400 400 / 400 / 400 400 / 400 / 400 344 / 344 / 344 316 / 316 / 316 800 800
3RT1276 500 / 500 / 500 500 / 500 / 500 500 / 500 / 500 430 / 430 / 430 385 / 385 / 385 340 / 340 / 340 316 / 316 / 316 800 800
3TF68 2) 630 / 630 / 630 502 / 502 / 502 440 / 440 / 440 408 / 408 / 408 376 / 376 / 376 344 / 344 / 344 317 / 317 / 317 800 5004)
3TF69 2) 630 / 630 / 630 630 / 630 / 630 572 / 572 / 572 531 / 531 / 531 500 / 500 / 500 469 / 469 / 469 438 / 438 / 438 800 6304)
1) Contactor installation possible (after disconnecting the box terminal block) 5) Assignment and short-circuit units according to IEC60947-4-1.
2) No contactor installation possible Type of assignment "1" : Scontactor or starter must not damage people or the plant if a short-circuit occurs.
3) Adhere to the operating voltage It does not need to be possible to continue operating without repairs or replacement parts.
4) Ensure that the safety separation between the maximum AC-3 operatingcurrent and the rated fuse current is sufficiently large. Type of assignment "2" : Contactor or starter must not damage people or the plant if a short-circuit occurs.
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for
and must be ready for further use. The danger of contact welding is given.
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

SIMOCODE pro
Index
Numerics Comment 10-20

9-pole SUB-D connection 11-16 Commissioning 2-9, 12-1, 12-2, 12-3
Communication 1-13, 10-1
A Communication parameters 10-20
Abbreviations and Specifications A-3, B-3 Communication principle 10-4
Accessories 1-18, 1-25 Configuration with SIMOCODE pro V
Active control stations A-2 11-11
Acyclic Configuring
writing 10-5 a Reversing Starter 2-1
writing and reading of data records SIMOCODE pro 10-6
10-10 the slave diagnostics 10-12
Addressing plug 1-18, 1-20, 1-25, 2-11, with a GSD file 10-6
11-14, 12-4 with SIMATIC PDM 10-8
Alarms 10-19 with the SIMOCODE ES software 10-8
Analog input 1-24 Connecting cable 1-18, 1-25
Analog module 1-2, 1-17, 1-23, 1-24 Connecting plugs with sockets 1-28
Analog output 1-24 Connecting SIMOCODE pro as a norm
Asymmetry limit 3-9 slave with a GSD file 10-6
Asymmetry monitoring 3-9 Connection cross-sections D-4
Asymmetry protection 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-9 Contactor controls 2-7, A-2
Control commands 4-1, 4-25, 4-28, 4-32,
B 4-38, 4-41, 4-51
Basic device parameter 10-20 Control data from PROFIBUS DP 1-27
basic factory default settings 2-2, 12-2 Control function 1-12, 4-1, 4-2, 4-10
Basic unit pin assignment 11-7 Control programs 1-2
Basic units 1-10, 1-19 Control station
Blocking limit 3-10 - local control 4-3
Blocking protection 3-2, 3-3, 3-10 - operator panel 4-4
Bus termination module 11-17 - PC 4-4
Buttons D-7 - PLC/DCS 4-3
Byte arrangements B-2 Control stations 4-1
Cooling down time 1-14
C Cooling time 3-7
Cable cross-section 11-6 Cos phi 1-22
Cable lengths D-4 Counter-clockwise rotation 4-28
Channel-related diagnostics 10-18 Counters 1-15, 9-2, 9-8
Checklist for selecting the device Cover for IP54 1-20
series 1-8 Covering 11-14
Circuit breaker 1-12, 1-19, 4-12, 4-22, 4-23 Current limit 1-11, 3-10
Class 1 master 10-2 Current measurement modules 1-16,
Class 2 master 10-2 1-21, 11-9, D-5
Class interval 3-10 Current measurement with current measu-
Clockwise rotation 4-28 rement modules 11-9
Color-coding on the connecting cable Current transformer 3-4
11-13, 11-15
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 Index-1
Index
Current/voltage measurement module Digital modules 1-17, 1-23

1-2, 1-16, 1-22 Dimension Drawings C-1
Cyclic Direct starter 1-4, 1-5, 1-12, 4-12, 4-17
controlling 10-9 Display D-3, D-6, D-7
services 1-13 Display and statistics data 10-20
signaling 10-9 Door adapter 1-18, 1-25
signaling data 2-12 DP master 10-2
data transfer 10-5 DPV1 slave 10-2
D E
Dahlander 1-12, 4-12, 4-32 to 4-34 Earth-fault detection 1-2
Dahlander circuit 4-33 Earth-fault module 1-11, 1-17, 1-23, 1-24
Dahlander Earth-fault monitoring 1-10, 1-17, 1-24
with reversal of the direction of EEx e applications 3-6, 3-12
rotation 4-12, 4-35, 4-36, 4-37, 4-43, EMC emitted interference according to
4-50 IEC 60947-1 D-2
Data Formats and Data Records B-1 EMC stability according to
Data record 130 - base device IEC 60947-1 D-2
parameter 1 B-16 Emergency start 1-13
Data record 131 - base device Enabled control command 4-31, 4-45,
parameter 2 B-22 4-55
Data record 133 - extended device Enables 4-1, 4-8
parameter 2 B-34 End position 4-45
Data record 139 - labeling B-37 Error types 10-18
Data record 160 - communication Execution time 4-14, 4-40, 4-45, 4-52
parameters B-38 Expansion modules 1-23, D-6
Data record 165 - comment B-38 Extended device parameter 10-20
Data record 202 - Acyclic controlling B-39
Data record 203 - Acyclic signaling B-40 F
Data record 224 - password protection Fault feedback 4-14
B-41 Feedback ON 4-13, 4-14, 4-41
Data record 67 B-4 Feedback time 4-14, 4-40, 4-52
Data record 67 - process image of the Fill level 1-6
outputs B-4 Fixing lugs for screw attachments 11-2
Data record 69 - process image of the Flashing 1-15, 9-2, 9-19
inputs B-5 Flickering 1-15, 9-2, 9-20
Data record 92 - device diagnostics B-6 Free acyclic
Data record 94 - measured values B-14 control data 10-20
Data record 95 - Service/statistics signaling data 10-20
data B-15 Function blocks 1-27
Data record DS132 - extended device para-
meter 1 B-26 G
Data records - overview 10-20, B-1 GSD (device data) 10-2
Data records (acyclic data) 10-10 GSD file 1-26, 10-6, 10-7
Degree of protection
(according to 60529) D-2 I
Delay pre-warning 3-8 Identification-related diagnostics 10-16
Detachable terminals 11-2 Independent operation 1-3
for basic units and expansion Input characteristic curve D-4
modules 11-6 Inputs (binary) D-6
Device diagnostics 10-20 Installation guidelines for the
Device series 1-2 PROFIBUS D 11-17
Diagnostic alarm 10-19 Installation location D-2
Diagnostic data 1-14 Integrating the GSD file into the configura-
Diagnostics with STEP 7 10-11 tion software 10-7
Digital module pin assignment 11-8 Integration in STEP7 10-8
Interfaces 11-1
SIMOCODE pro
Index-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6060-02
Index
Interlocking time 4-13, 4-14, 4-19 N

Network contactor, clockwise rotation
K 4-28
Key-operated switch operation 4-5 Non-maintained command mode 4-13,
4-40, 4-45, 4-52
L Non-volatile elements 1-15, 9-2, 9-16
Labeling 10-20 NOR function 9-15, 9-18
Lamp controls A-2 Norm diagnostics 10-5, 10-9
Local control 2-8 Notes on parameterizing 12-2
Left - fast 4-35 Number
Left - slow 4-35 of motor starts 1-14
Limit monitor 1-15, 9-2, 9-21, 9-23 of overload trippings 1-14
Limit overshooting 9-21 of start-ups 1-12
Limit temperature 3-11
Limit undershooting 9-21 O
Linking function blocks 2-7 Object Manager OM SIMOCODE pro
Load type 3-8, 4-13, 4-40, 4-52 1-18, 1-26, 10-2, 10-8
Local 4-5, 4-6 OM SIMOCODE ES Professional 10-10
Local control station 2-2, 2-3, 2-9 ON control command 4-45
Locking the contactor 4-13 Operating data 1-14
Logic Modules 1-15, 9-1 Operating hours 1-12
Operating range D-3
M Operational protection off (OPO) 1-13
Making internal assignments 4-51, 4-54 Operator enable of the individual control
Manual operation 4-5 stations 4-7
Manufacturer's identification 10-15 Operator panel 1-16, 1-20, 11-14, D-7
Master PROFIBUS address 10-15 Overload 3-6
Measured values 10-20 Overload protection 1-10, 3-1, 3-2 to 3-4,
Measurement frequency D-5 3-10
Measurement module D-3 Overload relay 1-12, 4-12, 4-16
Memory module 1-18, 1-20, 1-25, 11-14 Overview of system components 1-16
Mode selectors 4-5, 4-6
Modes of operation 4-1, 4-6 P
Monitoring 1-10 Parameter block 10-8
Monitoring Parameter dependences in the GSD 10-7
active power 1-11 Parameterization 2-7
analog signals 1-11 parameterization software 1-26
PLC/DCS 1-13 Parameterization starting 10-5
temperature 1-17 Password protection 10-20
the power factor (cos phi) 1-11 Pause time 3-7
Motor control functions 1-19 PC cable 1-18, 1-25, 11-14
Motor feeder 1-4, 1-5, 2-3 PCS 7 library SIMOCODE pro 1-26
Motor operating hours 1-14 Phase asymmetry 1-10, 1-14, 3-9
Motor power/cos phi 1-14 Phase currents 1-14
Motor protection functions 3-2 Phase cycle 1-14, 1-22
Motor stop times 1-14 Phase failure 1-10
Motor switching state 1-14 Phase voltages 1-14
Motor temperature 1-10, 1-14 Pin assignment 11-7, 11-8
Mounting 11-1, D-3, D-5, D-6, D-7 Pin cross-section 11-9
mounting lugs 11-2, 11-3, 11-4 PLC/DCS 4-5
Mounting Plugs (analog) 1-27
the basic units and expansion Plugs (digital) 1-27
modules 11-3 Pole-changing switches 1-12, 1-19, 4-12,
the current measurement 4-38, 4-39
modules 11-4 with reversal of the direction of
the operator panel 11-5 rotation 4-12, 4-41, 4-42
Mounting, Wiring and Interfaces 11-1
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 Index-3
Index
Power consumption D-3 from the basic unit in the memory

Power failure monitoring (UVO) 1-13 module 12-7
Preventive maintenance 12-6 from the memory module in the basic
Pre-warning 3-8 unit 12-8
Process alarm 10-19 Screw attachment 11-2 to 11-4
Process and diagnostic alarm 10-5, 10-9 Screw terminals 1-27
Process image (cyclic data) 10-10 Sensor circuit error 3-12
Process image Sensor measuring circuits 1-11
of the inputs 10-20 Sensors 1-17, 1-24
of the outputs 10-20 Sequence
Process monitoring 1-11 for connecting the system interface
PROFIBUS DP 1-13, 1-18, 2-2, 4-51, 4-53, 11-13, 11-15
10-2 for PROFIBUS DP connection 11-16
PROFIBUS DP Service data 1-14
interface 1-13, D-3 Servicing 12-1
on a 9-pole SUB-D socket 11-16 Set current D-5
PROFIBUS DPV1 10-2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address 2-10,
PTC 3-11 2-11
Pump 1-11 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address
Push-through opening 11-9, D-5 via SIMOCODE ES 2-11
Push-through system 1-16, 11-9 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address
via the addressing plug 2-11
R Shock resistance (sine pulse) D-2
Rail connection 11-9, D-5 Short-circuit protection D-4
Rail mounting 11-4 Signal conditioner 1-15, 9-2, 9-13
Rated Signaling data to PROFIBUS DP 1-27
control voltage D-3 SIMARIS manager 10-2
isolation current D-6 SIMATIC PDM 4-4, 10-8
isolation voltage D-3, D-5 SIMATIC PDM (PCS7) 10-2
surge voltage strength D-3, D-5, D-6 SIMATIC S7 1-26, 10-7
switching capacity D-6 SIMATIC S7-400 10-8
uninterrupted current D-6 SIMOCODE ES 1-18, 1-26, 2-2, 2-11, 4-1,
Reading data 10-3 4-4, 8-18, 10-2, 10-5, 10-8, 12-2, 12-4,
Reading out 12-7, B-37
statistic data 12-6 SIMOCODE pro parameterization 1-25
the diagnostics 10-11 SIMOCODE pro S7 slave 10-3
the statistics data 12-6 Slave modes of operation 10-5
Relay outputs D-4, D-6 Slide control 1-19, 4-49
Remote operation 4-5 Slider 1-12, 4-12, 4-46, 4-48
Remote/automatic 4-5 Snap-on mounting 11-3
Replacing a basic unit 12-9 Socket assignment table
Replacing expansion units 12-9 - analog A-11
Reset 1-13, 3-8 - digital A-4
Responses 3-3 Sockets (analog) 1-27
Reversing Starter 1-12, 2-2, 4-8, 4-12, Sockets (digital) 1-27
4-19, 4-20 Soft reversing starter 4-12, 4-53, 4-54
Right - fast 4-35 Soft starter 1-12, 4-12, 4-51, 4-52
Right - slow 4-35 Soft starter control, 1-19
Standard function modules 1-13
S Star contactor 4-28
Save switching command 4-13 Star-delta circuit 1-10
Saving parameters Star-delta connection 4-29
from a SIMOCODE ES file to a Star-delta starter 4-12, 4-26
basic unit 12-8 with reversal of the direction of
from the basic unit in a rotation 4-12, 4-28, 4-30
SIMOCODE ES file 12-7 Star-delta starters 1-12, 1-19, 4-25
SIMOCODE pro
Index-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6060-02
Index
Starting up parameter data 10-10 Truth table for 5I/2O 9-7

Start-up parameterization 10-8, 10-10 Truth tables 1-15, 9-2
Start-up time 3-4 Types of sensors 3-11
Station status 1 10-13 Types of signal 9-17
Station status 2 10-14 Types of signals 9-14
Station status 3 10-14
Statistics data 12-6 U
Status messages 10-5, 10-9, 10-17 Unit replacement 1-25
Status signals/messages A-2
STEP 7 user program 10-11 V
Stop time 1-12 Valve 1-12, 4-12, 4-44, 4-45
Strip length 11-6 Valve control 1-19
Summation current transformer 1-2, 1-11, Variants for slide control 4-49
1-17, 1-24 Voltage monitoring 1-11
Switch off time 3-4
Switching from star to delta 4-25, 4-28 W
Switching interval 4-13, 4-14, 4-26, 4-29, Warnings 1-13, 1-14
4-32, 4-36, 4-38, 4-40 Watchdog 1-13
Switching Win SIMOCODE DP Converter 1-26
the direction of rotation 4-19, 4-28, Win SIMOCODE DP parameter files 1-26
4-35, 4-41, 4-53 Wiring 11-1, 11-6
the direction of travel 4-47 the detachable terminals 11-7, 11-8
the speed 4-32, 4-35, 4-38, 4-41 Writing data 10-3
System interface 1-16, 11-13
System interface cover 1-18, 1-25, 11-12
System interfaces 11-10, 11-14, D-3, D-5,
D-6, D-7
T
T module 3-11
Tables A-1
Technical Data D-1
Telegram description 10-9
Temperature module 1-2, 1-11, 1-17, 1-23,
1-24
Temperature monitoring 1-11, 1-24, 3-11,
3-12
Temperature sensors 1-2
Test position feedback (TPF) 1-13
Test/reset button D-3
Thermistor protection 3-1, 3-2, 3-12, D-4
Thermistor sensors 1-10, 3-11
Tightening torques 11-6
Time stamping in the fault memory 8-18
Time synchronization 1-13
Time to trip 1-14
Timer 1-15, 9-2, 9-10
Timestamping 1-13, 8-18
Torque 4-49
Transferring the parameters to the basic
device 2-9
Transmitting data 10-4
Tripping class 3-4, 3-5
Tripping time 3-5
Truth table for 2I/1O 9-6
Truth table for 3I/1O 9-3
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 Index-5
Index
SIMOCODE pro
Index-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6060-02
Sender (please complete)
Name
Comany / department
To
SIEMENS AG Address
A&D CD MM3
Telephone
92220 Amberg, Germany
Fax:
Fax: ++49 9621/ 80-3337
SIMOCODE pro Manual

Did you notice an error while reading this manual?
If so, please let us know using this form.
We are grateful for your comments and suggestions.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Automation and Drives

Low Voltage Controls and Distribution
Postfach 4848
D-90327 Nürnberg
w w w . s i e m e n s.com/simocode Order No.: 3UF7970-0AA00-0
Safety and Commissioning
Information for
Potentially Explosive Areas E
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find safety and commissioning information for
potentially explosive areas. It is imperative that you observe this information
when you have to protect motors in potentially explosive areas.
Target groups
• commissioners
• maintenance and service personnel
Necessary knowledge
• explosion protection
• EN 60079-14/VDE 0165 for the installation of electrical apparatus in
potentially explosive/hazardous areas with gas
• EN 50281-1-2 for the installation of electrical apparatus in potentially
explosive/hazardous areas with dust
• VDE 0118 for the erection of electrical installations in underground mines
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 E-1
Safety and Commissioning Information for Potentially Explosive Areas
E.1 General
Information and standards
The increased danger in potentially explosive areas makes the careful
observance of the following notes and standards necessary:
• EN 60079-14/VDE 0165 for the installation of electrical apparatus in
potentially explosive/hazardous areas with gas
• EN 50281-1-2 for the installation of electrical apparatus in potentially
explosive/hazardous areas with dust
• VDE 0118 for the erection of electrical installations in underground mines
All 3UF7 devices are certified under Device Group I, Category “M2”
(mining) and Device Group II, Category 2 in the area “GD” (areas in which
explosive gas, steam, fog and air mixtures, as well as inflammable dust, are
present):
BVS 04 ATEX F 003 I (M2)
BVS 04 ATEX F 003 II (2) GD
Warning
All work for connecting, commissioning and maintenance must be carried
out by qualified, responsible personnel. Unprofessional behavior can cause
serious damage to persons and goods.
SIMOCODE pro
E-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
E.2 Setting up and commissioning
Attention
Follow the operating instructions (enclosed with the devices)
SIMOCODE pro
Basic device Order number 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1
Current measurement module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1
Current/voltage measurement Order number 3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1
module
Digital module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1
E.2.1 Setting the rated current of the motor
Configure the 3UF7 to the rated current of the motor (according to the type
plate or design test certificate of the motor).
Attention
Note the release class/release characteristic curve of the 3UF7.
Select the release class so that the motor is also thermally protected even
with a blocked rotor.
Motors, cables and contactors must be designed for the selected release
class.
Attention
Set the response of the overload protection to “Switch off”!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 E-3
Example
Motor 500 V, 50/60 Hz, 110 kW, 156 A, temperature class T3, time TE = 11 s,
IA/Ie = 5.5:
TE = 11 s
IA/Ie = 5.5
Fig. 5-1: Switch-off conditions of the EExe motor, selected: CLASS 10
SIMOCODE pro
E-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
E.2.2 3UF70 with thermistor input
For the 3UF70 you can use a type A temperature sensor with a
characteristic curve according to IEC 60947-8 (DIN VDE 0660, part 303), DIN
44081 and DIN 44082.
Depending on the number of sensors, this results in the following release
and restart temperatures:
Fig. 5-2: Typical characteristic curve of a type A sensor (logarithmic scale)
Depending on the number of sensors, the following release and restart

temperatures result in relation to the NFT (nominal functioning temperature
of the sensor):
Release temperature Restart temperature
3 sensors NFT + 4 K NFT - 7 K

6 sensors NFT - 5 K NFT - 20 K
Table 5-1: Release and restart temperatures
The specified temperatures are limit values.
Attention
Set the response of the activated thermistor to “Switch off”!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 E-5
E.2.3 Wiring of the sensor circuit
Caution
Lay the measuring circuit cables as separate control cables.
The use of conductors of the motor feeder or other main current cables is
not permitted.
Shielded control cables must be used if extremely inductive or capacitive
interferences are to be expected due to parallel heavy current cables.
Maximum cable length of the sensor circuit cables:
Cable Cable lengths at the thermistor input

cross section
without short-circuit with short-circuit recognition 1)
recognition
2.5 mm2 2x 2800 m 2x 250 m
1.5 mm2 2x 1500 m 2x 150 m

0.5 mm2 2x 500 m 2x 50 m
1) A short circuit in the sensor circuit is recognized up to this maximum cable length.
Table 5-2: Maximum cable length of the sensor circuit cables
It is recommended to evaluate the short-circuit recognition.

If the short-circuit recognition of the sensor cable is not evaluated, the
sensor resistance must be measured with a suitable measuring device
during commissioning or after modifications/maintenance work has been
carried out (mounting, demounting the system). The sensor circuit must be
checked for short circuits when the resistances are < 50 Ohm.
E.2.4 Short-circuit protection according to IEC 60947-4-1 for type of

coordination 2
The short-circuit protection must be ensured by separate overcurrent

protection devices.
Caution
Note the respective maximum fuse protection of the contactor for type of
coordination 2 when combining with other contactors.
SIMOCODE pro
E-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
E.2.5 Cable protection
Caution
Avoid impermissable high surface temperatures of the cables by correctly
dimensioning the cross sections!
Select a sufficient cross section - especially with heavy starting CLASS 20
to CLASS 40!
E.2.6 Test
Carry out a test when commissioning and cyclically every 12 months at

the latest!
The test comprises a complete function test. All three test phases (see
below) must be carried out. These include hardware test, current
measurement in all phases used and switching off the motor contactors
(complete control chain with motor supply). The measured current values
must be checked!
Attention:
The test must be carried out by a professional who knows the specified
standards!
Test phases
• Phase 1: hardware test/lamp test (0 to 2 s):
The hardware (e.g. the thermistor electronics) is tested, all LEDs and displays
are activated, as are the lamp controls. The contactor controls remain
unchanged.
• Phase 2: hardware test results (2 to 5 s):
If there is an fault, the “HW fault basic unit” fault is triggered.
If there is no fault,
– the “GEN. FAULT” LED flashes if no main current is flowing
– the “GEN. FAULT” LED flickers if main current flows in all three phases
(special case: for “1-phase load” in one phase).
• Phase 3: relay test (> 5 s):
If a test is implemented with switch-off, the contactor controls are
deactivated.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 E-7
The following table shows the test phases carried out when the “TEST/
RESET” button is pressed for the respective period of time:
Test Status Without main current With main current

phase
O.K. Fault *) O.K. Fault
Hardware test/lamp test
“DEVICE” LED Green Green Green Green

< 2s
“GEN.FAULT”
LED
Contactor control Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged
Show QL*
Hardware test / lamp test result
“DEVICE” LED Green Red Green Red

2s - 5s
“GEN.FAULT”
LED
Contactor control Unchanged Deactivated Unchanged Deactivated
Relay test
“DEVICE” LED Green Red Green Red

> 5s
“GEN.FAULT”
LED
Contactor control Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated
LED lit/activated LED flashing LED flickering LED off
*) “Fault” displayed after 2 s
Table 5-3: Statuses of the status LEDs/contactor controls during the test
SIMOCODE pro
E-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
E.2.7 Further safety information
Caution
Only the relay outputs of the 3UF70 basic unit or the 3UF730 monostable
digital module may be used for the protection function!
Warning
The 3UF7 is not suitable for set-up in potentially explosive areas.
The device may only be used in a switchgear cabinet which has at least the
IP 4x degree of protection.
When setting up in potentially explosive areas, the 3UF7 may not cause any
danger of fire. Corresponding measures must be taken (e.g. encapsulation).
Caution
SIMOCODE pro C - basic unit 1:
Short-term energy failures (voltage failures < approx. 50 ms) do not lead to
any failure of the protection system.
Long-term energy failures (voltage failures > approx. 50 ms) lead to
deactivation of the relay outputs.
SIMOCODE pro V - basic unit 2:

Short-term energy failures (voltage failures < approx. 200 ms) do not lead to
any failure of the protection system.
Long-term energy failures (voltage failures > approx. 200 ms) lead to
deactivation of the relay outputs.
If the 3UF7 is in the “Automatic RESET” mode of operation, the reset is

done automatically after the cooling down time has expired without
pressing the “RESET” button. It must be guaranteed here via an additional
ON button that the motor does not automatically start after tripping. If the
3UF7 is used in this case without additional thermistor protection, the
motor may only be switched on by professionals.
Warning
The “Automatic RESET” mode of operation may not be used in applications
in which an unexpected restart can lead to damage to persons or objects.
Attention:
The 3UF7 is not suitable for the load-side operation of frequency converters.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 E-9
E.2.8 Ambient conditions
Range of the permitted ambient temperature:

• Storage/transport: -40 °C to +80 °C
• Operation: -25 °C to +60 °C
E.3 Maintenance and repair

The devices are maintenance-free.
Warning
Repairs on the device may only be carried out by the manufacturer.
E.4 Guarantee
The guarantee presumes the observance of this safety and commissioning
information of the operating instructions
SIMOCODE pro
Basic device Order number 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1
Current measurement module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1
Current/voltage measurement Order number 3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1
module
Digital module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1
and the complete manual Order number 3UF7970-0AA0x-0
E.5 Further information

You can find further information on the 3UF7 in the LV10 Siemens catalog
“Switchgear for Industry” or on the Internet at
http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi/cd.
SIMOCODE pro
E-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Simocode Manual

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Simocode Manual

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

System Manual Version 10/2004

Commissioning and Servicing 12

Copyright Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved Disclaimer of Liability

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft A5E00248055-02

Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii

System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1-2

2 Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 Introduction and target of the example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

3 Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

4 Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1 Control stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4.1.3 Enables and enabled control command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 4-8

5 Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1 Earth-fault monitoring via current/voltage measurement module . . .. .. . 5-2

6.1 Introduction . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 6-2

7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 7-2

7.5 Acyclic controlling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

8 Standard Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 8-2

9 Logic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 9-2

10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . 10-2

11 Mounting, Wiring and Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.1 General information about mounting and wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 11-2

12 Commissioning and Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

12.1 General information about commissioning and servicing. .. .. . . .. .. . 12-2

A.1 Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and

B Data Formats and Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

B.1 Handling data records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-2

B.9 Data record DS132 - extended device parameter 1 . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-26

C Dimension Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

C.1 3UF70 basic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . C-2

D Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

D.1 Common technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2

Purpose of the manual

Required basic knowledge

Topic Target group

Tables for the response of SIMOCODE pro

Response Function 1 Function 2 Function 3

Short description of the response

SIMOCODE pro is a flexible, modular motor management system which

Operator panel (OP)

SIMOCODE pro V Basic unit (BU2)

Digital module (DM)

Operator panel (OP)

Additional optional expansions are possible

Figure 1-1: Typical configurations of SIMOCODE pro

1.2 Simplify configuration with SIMOCODE pro

The following figure shows the conventional configuration of a direct starter:

3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230V 1L1

Figure 1-2: Conventional configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter)

Configuration with SIMOCODE pro

3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230V

Current measurment A1 A2 IN1 IN2 24 V

1.3 Application example

Controlling the pump

PLC/DCS Control station

Current measurement A1 A2 IN1 IN2 24 V In+ In– Control station -

T1 T2 OUT 1 1 Out+ Out–

Figure 1-4: Schematic of a typical application example

Record, display and evaluate the measured values